Home

Standard Mode

1. Byte Data Bo Py bits 11 4 B P4 bits 3 0 Po bits 3 0 Bo P4 bits 11 4 B3 Po bits 11 4 By P3 bits 3 0 Ps bits 3 0 Bs P3 bits 11 4 Bg Py bits 11 4 B7 P5 bits 3 0 P bits 3 0 Bs P5 bits 11 4 Bg Pg bits 11 4 Bio P7 bits 3 0 Pg bits 3 0 B41 Pz bits 11 4 e e e e e e e Bm 5 Ph 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 P 9 bits 3 O P 3 bits 3 0 Bm 3 Ph 2 bits 11 4 Bm 2 Ph 1 bits 11 4 Bm 1 Ph bits 3 0 P 1 bits 3 0 Bm Ph bits 11 4 Basler scout 159 Pixel Data Formats When a monochrome camera is set for Mono 12 Packed the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the unsigned type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 160 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats 8 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2 Packed pixel data format the camera transmits Y U and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed The Y value transmitted for each pixel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data transmitted when a monochrome camera is
2. g F 1 Lc mee A cece SC LH se a E Cir tf open BE ees HS Fig 68 Vertical Binning With horizontal binning adjacent pixels from 2 columns 3 columns or a maximum of 4 columns are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 69 illustrates horizontal bin ning Horizontal Binning by 2 Horizontal Binning by 3 Horizontal Binning by 4 COGOEGOED04 GoOGoD 0 O0D aoao g Guo Good GOGUGODEO GCoOUGRUGLD GOODE cocoa conpaionp m E E Copaon cocog g CoD 0DUIDE cocoon 0 2D j COCOCOCDT1 1 D0 Fig 69 Horizontal Binning Basler scout 201 Standard Features You can combine vertical and horizontal binning This however may cause objects to appear dis torted in the image For more information on possible image distortion due to combined vertical and horizontal binning see below Setting Binning You can enable vertical binning by setting the Binning Vertical parameter Setting the parameter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables vertical binning by 2 vertical binning by 3 or vertical binning by 4 respec tively Se
3. Camera LineInverter SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 69 1 0 Control 6 2 4 Working with Timers The camera has four timer output signals available Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 and Timer 4 As shown in Figure 41 each timer works as follows A trigger source event occurs that starts the timer A delay period begins to expire When the delay expires the timer signal goes high and a duration period begins to expire When the duration period expires the timer signal goes low Duration e Delay lt _____ gt Trigger source event occurs Fig 41 Timer Signal Currently the only trigger source event available to start the timer is exposure active In other words you can use exposure start to trigger the start of a timer Timer 1 can only be assigned to output line 1 Timer 2 can only be assigned to output line 2 Timer 3 can only be assigned to output line 3 Timer 4 can only be assigned to output line 4 If you require the timer signal to be high when the timer is triggered and to go low when the delay expires simply set the output line to invert 6 2 4 1 Setting the Trigger Source for a Timer To set the trigger source for a t
4. For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 7 1 on page 77 This section presents an overview of the elements involved with controlling the acquisition of images Reading this section will give you an idea about how these elements fit together and will make it easier to understand the detailed information in the sections that follow Four major elements are involved in controlling the acquisition of images Acquisition start and acquisition stop commands and the acquisition mode parameter The acquisition start trigger The frame start trigger Exposure time control When reading the explanations in the overview and in this entire chapter keep in mind that the term frame is typically used to mean a single acquired image When reading the material in this section it is helpful to refer to Figure 43 on page 81 and to the use case diagrams in Section 7 8 on page 119 These diagrams present the material related to the acquisition start and stop commands the acquisition mode the acquisition start trigger and the frame start trigger in a graphical format Basler scout 79 Image Acquisition Control Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode The Acquisition Start command prepares the camera to acquire frames The camera cannot acquire frames unless an Acquisition Start command has first been executed A parameter called the Acquisition Mode has a direct bearing
5. Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s Exposure Time Abs parameter For more information about the camera s Exposure Time Abs parameter see Section 7 7 on page 116 Basler scout 93 Image Acquisition Control 7 5 1 2 Frame Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on you must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera each time you want to begin a frame acquisition The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal that will act as the frame start trigger signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the frame start trigger on the host PC Line 1 When the source signal is set to line 1 you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical
6. Photosensitive surface of the sensor 0 12 57008 This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the S lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y scA640 70fm fc 0 47 0 63 scA1300 32m fce 0 47 0 63 scA640 74fm fc 0 35 0 47 scA1390 17fm fc 0 31 0 42 scA640 120fm fc 0 62 0 83 scA1400 17fm fc 0 25 0 34 scA750 60fm fc 0 51 0 80 scA1400 30fm fc 0 25 0 34 scA780 54fm fc 0 35 0 47 scA1600 14fm fc 0 34 0 52 scA1000 20fm fc 0 46 0 63 scA1600 28fm fc 0 34 0 52 scA1000 30fm fc 0 46 0 63 Fig 24 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras with an Optional CS mount Lens Adapter in mm unless otherwise noted 28 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 2 90 Head Housing The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 assuming that the lens mount is covered by a lens or by the cap that is shipped with the camera 1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points In scout cameras with the 90 head housing the camera s direction of view is at right angle to the
7. 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 Fig 10 scA1600 14fm and scA1600 28fm Spectral Response Basler scout 500 600 Wave Length nm 700 800 900 1000 17 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras The following graphs show the spectral response for each available color camera model Note The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics light source characteristics and IR cut filter characteristics To obtain best performance from color models of the camera use of a dielectric IR cut filter is recommended The filter should transmit in a range from 400 nm to 700 720 nm and it should cut off from 700 720 nm to 1100 nm A suitable IR cut filter is included in the standard C mount lens adapter on color models of the camera An IR cut filter is not included in the optional CS mount adapter Relative Response 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 11 scA640 70fc Spectral Response 18 Basler scout Relative Response 500 Wave Length nm Fig 12 scA640 74fc Spectral Response 1 0 550 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 Relative Response 0 0 400 500 Wave Length nm Fig 13 scA640 120fc Spectral Response Basler scout 550 Specifications Requirements a
8. 0 5 0 4 0 3 Relative Response 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm Fig 5 scA780 54fm Spectral Response 14 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm Fig 6 scA1000 20fm and scA1000 30fm Spectral Response 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm Fig 7 scA1300 32fm Spectral Response Basler scout 15 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Relative Response Fig 8 Relative Response Fig 9 scA1400 17fm and scA1400 30fm Spectral Response 16 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 scA1390 17fm Spectral Response 1 0 500 600 Wave Length nm 700 800 900 1000 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wave Length nm 700 800 900 1000 Basler scout 1 0 0 9 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3
9. Camera ExposureAuto SetValue ExposureAuto_Continuous j For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 9 11 1 on page 214 For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them see Section 9 11 1 2 on page 216 For information about minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time see Section Table 13 on page 116 in Section 7 7 on page 116 224 Basler scout Standard Features 9 11 4 Auto Function Profile If you want to use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time you must also set the auto function profile The auto function profile specifies whether the gain or the exposure time will be kept as low as possible when the system is making automatic adjustments as it attempts to reach the target average gray value To use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time carry out the following steps 1 Set the auto function profile to specify whether gain or exposure time will be minimized during adjustments 2 Set the gain auto function to the continuous mode of operation 3 Set the exposure auto function to the continuous mode of operation You can set the auto function profile from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API
10. Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation_RisingEdge Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 88 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 4 4 Using A Software Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 7 4 4 1 Introduction If the camera s Acquisition Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Acquisition Start Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera before you can begin frame acquisition A software acquisition start trigger signal is applied by Setting the Trigger Selector parameter to Acquisition Start Executing a Trigger Software command The camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame trigger signals when in this acquisition status When a software acquisition start trigger signal is received by the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of fra
11. For more information about absolute exposure time settings and related limitations see Section 7 7 2 on page 118 For more information about exposure modes and how to select them see Section 7 5 2 on page 96 Section 7 5 3 on page 98 Section 7 6 2 on page 107 and Section 7 6 3 on page 109 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 9 11 4 on page 225 To use the exposure auto function carry out the following steps Make sure trigger width exposure mode is not selected Select Auto Function AOI1 Set the postion and size of Auto Function AOI1 Set the lower and upper limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value Set the target average gray value If necessary set the auto function profile NO a RFwWN gt Enable the exposure auto function by setting it to once or continuous You must choose the continuous setting when using the auto function profile The settable limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value are limited by the minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time of the camera model Basler scout 223 Standard Features The target average gray value may range from 0 black to 255 white Note that this range of numbers applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit 12 bit effective output modes Accordingly also for 16 bit output modes black is represented by 0 and white by 255 You can carry out steps 1 to 7 from within your application software by using the pylon API
12. As shown in the I O line schematic each input line is opto isolated See the previous section for input voltages and their significances The absolute maximum input voltage is 30 0 VDC The current draw for each input line is between 5 and 15 mA Figure 35 shows an example of a typical circuit you can use to input a signal into the camera By default Input Line 1 is assigned to receive an external hardware trigger ExTrig signal that can be used to control the start of image acquisition Your 12 Pin Gnd Receptacle i et V Camera PERR 30 VOC O_In1 3 Absolute BF545C 4 Max 5 6 7 3 3 V 8 Your O Gnd In_1_Ctrl Fig 35 Typical Input Circuit For more information on input line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 5 2 on page 50 For more information about how to use an ExTrig signal to control image acquisition see Section 7 4 5 on page 90 Section 7 5 3 on page 98 and Section 7 6 3 on page 109 For more information about configuring the input lines see Section 6 1 on page 65 Basler scout 59 Physical Interface 5 7 2 Output Lines 5 7 2 1 Voltage Requirements The following voltage requirements apply to the I O output VCC pin 10 of the 12 pin receptacle Voltage Significance lt 3 3 VDC The I O output may operate erratically 3 3 to 24 VDC Recommended operating voltage 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum the camera may be damaged if the absolute maximum is e
13. Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Warranty Precautions To ensure that your warranty remains in force Do not remove the camera s serial number label If the label is removed and the serial number can t be read from the camera s registers the warranty is void Do not open the camera housing Do not open the housing Touching internal components may damage them Keep foreign matter outside of the camera Be careful not to allow liquid flammable or metallic material inside of the camera housing If operated with any foreign matter inside the camera may fail or cause a fire Avoid Electromagnetic fields Do not operate the camera in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields Avoid electrostatic charging Transport Properly Transport the camera in its original packaging only Do not discard the packaging Clean Properly Avoid cleaning the surface of the camera s sensor if possible If you must clean it use a soft lint free cloth dampened with a small quantity of high quality window cleaner Because electrostatic discharge can damage the sensor you must use a cloth that will not generate static during cleaning cotton is a good choice To clean the surface of the camera housing use a soft dry cloth To remove severe stains use a soft cloth dampened with a small quantity of neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the housing they can damage the sur
14. The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and execute the commands related to hardware acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode We will use the trigger width exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with external acquisition start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On 114 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation_RisingEdge Set for the trigger width exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_TriggerWidth Prepare for frame acquisition here Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Frame acquisition will start ea
15. Even Lines Odd Lines Byte Data Byte Data Bo Red value for Po Bo Green value for Po By Green value for P4 B4 Blue value for P4 Bo Red value for P2 Bo Green value for Pa B3 Green value for P3 B3 Blue value for P3 By Red value for P4 B4 Green value for P4 Bs Green value for P5 Bs Blue value for Ps 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e Bm 5 Red value for Ph 5 Bm 5 Green value for Ph 5 Bm 4 Green value for Ph 4 Bm 4 Blue value for Ph 4 Bn 3 Red value for Ph 3 Bm 3 Green value for P 3 Bm 2 Green value for P 5 Bm 2 Blue value for Ph 2 Bm 1 Red value for Ph 4 Bm 1 Green value for P 4 Bm Green value for Ph Bm Blue value for Ph 166 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats With the camera set for Bayer RG8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 Basler scout 167 Pixel Data Formats 8 3 4 Bayer BG 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 16 pixel data format it outputs 16 bits of data per pixel with 12 bits effective The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros With the Bayer BG 16 the pixel data is not pro
16. Making AOI parameter changes on the fly means making the parameter changes while the camera is capturing images continuously On the fly changes are only allowed for the parameters that determine the position of the AOI i e the Offset X and Offset Y parameters Changes to the AOI size are not allowed on the fly 200 Basler scout Standard Features 9 7 Binning All Models Except scA750 60 The binning feature is only available on the monochrome cameras The binning feature is not available on scA750 60 cameras Binning increases the camera s response to light by summing the charges from adjacent pixels into one pixel Two types of binning are available vertical binning and horizontal binning With vertical binning adjacent pixels from 2 lines 3 lines or a maximum of 4 lines in the imaging sensor array are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 68 illustrates vertical binning Vertical Binning by 2 Vertical Binning by 3 Vertical Binning by 4 a Belobo CoD EERE a LL It Fi cocoa Go Go Go COE OC OCD es a A A
17. 12 4 Troubleshooting Charts The following pages contain several troubleshooting charts that can help you find the cause of problems users sometimes encounter The charts assume that you are familiar with the camera s features and settings If you are not we suggest that you review the camera manual before you troubleshoot a problem The charts also assume that you have the pylon Viewer software installed on your host PC and that you are familiar with using the software For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 271 Troubleshooting and Support 12 4 1 My Camera Is Not Being Recognized Use this chart if your camera is connected to a PC but is not being recognized by the PC Does your PC have a Windows XP ora No The cameras will only work with these Windows 2000 operating system operating systems Yes Start the pylon Viewer software Is your camera listed in Yes Go to the I Do Not Get an Image the device tree at the left side of the viewer window troubleshooting chart No Make sure that the correct camera driver is associated with the camera To do this perform Yes the Associating the Driver with Additional Cameras portion of the installation procedure Open the Windows device manager Do you see a device listing for Basler pylon 1394 Digital Cameras No Check the camera power source If the camera is connected to an IEEE 1394 adapter in a desktop com
18. Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger For more information about using a software trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 7 4 4 on page 89 For more information about using a hardware trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 7 4 5 on page 90 trigger Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 4 on page 85 By default input line 1 is selected as the source signal for the acquisition start Basler scout 105 Image Acquisition Control Exposure Time Control with the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 the exposure time for each frame acquisition can be controlled with the exposure time parameters or it can be controlled by manipulating the hardware trigger signal For more information about controlling exposure time when using a software trigger see Section 7 4 4 on page 89 For
19. H x V pixels fc 1624 x 1230 Sensor Type Sony ICX274 AL AQ Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 1 8 Pixel Size 4 4 um x 4 4 um Max Frame Rate 28 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type IEEE 1394b Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 8 to 36 VDC supplied via the IEEE 1394 cable lt 1 ripple 42W 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional 10 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA1600 28fm fc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors Weight standard housing 90 head housing 170 g typical Conformity CE FCC GenlCam IP30 Table 5 Gene
20. Image Acquisition Control Formula 2 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the number of packets needed to transmit a captured frame from the camera to your host PC via the IEEE 1394 bus Packets per frame Value of the Payload Size Parameter Value of the Packet Size Parameter round the result up to the nearest integer 1 Packets per frame x 125 us Max Frames s Example Assume that you are using a monochrome scA750 60 camera set for an exposure time of 2000 us and for 600 x 400 resolution Also assume that you have checked the value of the Payload Size parameter and the Packet Size parameters and found them to be 327100 and 8192 respectively Formula 1 1 Max Frames 2600 us 400 1 x 31 01 us 186 08 pS Max Frames s 68 3 frames s Formula 2 327100 8192 Packets per frame Packets per frame 39 9 Round the result up to 40 1 Max Frames s 40 x 125 us Max Frames s 200 frames s Formula one returns the lowest value So in this case the limiting factor is the sum of the exposure time plus the sensor readout time and the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate would be 68 3 frames per second 150 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 14 1 Effect of the Packet Size Setting on the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate After a camera acquires a frame the image data is read out from the sensor into a buffer Once the frame has been read out to the buffer the data is packetiz
21. Relative Response wn 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 20 scA1600 14fc and scA1600 28fc Spectral Response Basler scout 23 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 Mechanical Specifications 1 5 1 Standard Housing The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 assuming that the lens mount is covered by a lens or by the cap that is shipped with the camera 1 5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The dimensions in millimeters for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter are as shown in Figure 21 The dimensions for cameras equipped with an optional CS mount lens adapter are shown in Figure 22 on page 26 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the bottom as shown in the drawings 24 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 2 x M3 4 5 deep Ra Bottom co 2 3 N K 97 67 2 a 2 x M3 4 deep 80 15 T 4 5 16 2x M3 4 5 deep BAS Se BASLER I to X i 5 Cout 3 N L zi es 72 3 _
22. Select Auto Function AOI1 Set the postion and size of Auto Function AOI1 Set the lower and upper limits for the Gain Raw All parameter value Set the target average gray value If necessary set the auto function profile oa RON Enable the gain auto function by setting it to once or continuous You must choose the continuous setting when using the auto function profile The currently settable limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value depend on the current pixel data format on the current settings for binning and on whether or not the Gain Raw parameter limits for the manually set gain feature are disabled The target average gray value may range from 0 black to 255 white Note that this range of numbers applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit 12 bit effective output modes So for 16 bit output modes black is also represented by 0 and white by 255 You can carry out steps 1 to 6 from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI Setting the limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value The currently accessible minimum and maximum parameter values are chosen as examples Setting the target average gray value A medium gray value is chosen as an example Enabling the gain auto function and selecting for example the once mode of operation Basler scout 221 Standard Features Select
23. YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 10 bits 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 8 to 36 VDC supplied via the IEEE 1394 cable lt 1 ripple 17W 12V 25W 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA750 60fm fc scA780 54fm fc scA1000 20fm fc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 160 g typical 180 g typical Conformity CE FCC GenlCam IP30 Table 2 General Specifications Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA1000 30fm fc scA1300 32fm fc scA1390 17 fm fc Sensor
24. an E m Image AOI Ane O Fig 77 Various Degrees of Overlap Between the Auto Function AOI and the Image AOI 218 Basler scout Standard Features Setting an Auto Function AOI Setting an Auto Function AOI is a two step process You must first select the Auto Function AOI related to the auto function that you want to use and then set the size and the position of the Auto Function AOI By default an Auto Function AOI is set to the full resolution of the camera s sensor You can change the size and the position of an Auto Function AOI by changing the value of the Auto Function AOs X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the Auto Function AOI The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting line for the Auto Function AOI The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the Auto Function AOI The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the Auto Function AOI When you are setting an Auto Function AOI you must follow these guidelines The sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the camera s sensor For example on the scA640 70 the sum of t
25. contact numbers appear on the title page of this manual Basler scout 275 Troubleshooting and Support 12 4 4 Get Poor Image Quality Use this chart if you can capture images but they are poor quality If you can t capture images at all use the Do Not Get an Image troubleshooting chart Start the pylon Viewer software Go to the Image Formats Controls parameter group enable one of the test images and use the single grab button to capture an image Do test images look OK Yes Disable the test image Place an object in the field of view of the camera Using your normal lighting and camera settings capture several images Are the images too dark 276 Is the imaging system operating in an environment with No strong EMI generators such as stepper motors switching power supplies or other high current AC devices Yes Make sure that you are using high quality cables and that the cables and the system are placed as far as possible from sources of EMI Did this correct the No Suspect the IEEE1394 cables the adapter card in your PC or the hub if you are using one The best way to troubleshoot these devices is to swap them with known good devices and then see if the problem is corrected Did this correct the problem problem Yes Exit this chart Yes gt No Yes No Exit this chart Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers a
26. ee 90 109 frame Start satiireihin 98 horizontal DINNING seeen 201 horizontal mirror image eesse 204 housing 90 head eneee eaan upa niata eniai 1 29 standard re 1 24 NUMIA iha aea 36 l IEEE 1394b device information 55 image acquisition control mode EE aie lek eee 77 standard mate erna anaes 77 image distortion eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 203 Basler scout image property target value oo eeeeeeeeeteeeenneeeees 214 input lines CONFIQUIING ia aeaiee reata iaaa aaia 65 electrical characteristics 0 59 voltage requirements ceee 57 installation hardware o eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesneanees 41 SOPWANEC 00 ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeteteees 41 integrate enabled signal eee 131 inverter OULPULIINGS Adie eiaeia ents 69 TPO ace cheetah ete eres eet d aa tts 24 29 IR cut filter oo eee cceeeeeeeeees 18 32 197 L Es SB Sherrer are ere ar ee e E eee eae ie 49 270 lens adapter ceeeeee 2 4 6 8 10 lens thread length ccce 32 line inverter parameter eeeeeeeee 69 line selector 67 131 134 136 139 line source parameter secere ae aTe 67 131 134 136 139 line status all chunk seeen 259 line status parameter eccere 75 lookup table ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 207 210 luminance lookup table 4 207 210 O D A E 207 210 LUT enable parameter aaien 209 212 LUT index parameter isece 209 212 LUT se
27. 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 160 g typical 180 g typical Conformity CE FCC GenlCam IP30 Table 1 General Specifications Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA750 60fm fc scA780 54fm fc scA1000 20fm fc Sensor Size fm 752 x 480 fm 782 x 582 fm 1034 x 779 H x V pixels fc 750 x 480 fc 780 x 580 fc 1032 x 778 Sensor Type Aptina MT9V022 formerly Sony ICX415 AL AQ Sony ICX204 AL AK known as the Micron MT9V022 Progressive Scan CMOS Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 3 1 2 1 3 Pixel Size 6 0 um x 6 0 um 8 3 um x 8 3 um 4 65 um x 4 65 um Max Frame Rate 64 9 fps 58 fps 21 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type IEEE 1394b Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer RG 8 DCAM Raw 8
28. The descriptions in the previous section assume that all of the devices on the bus are IEEE 1394b devices If the bus has mixed IEEE 1394a devices and IEEE 1394b devices determining how to share bandwidth between devices is a bit more difficult As a first step toward understanding the situation consider the difference between 1394a devices and 1394b devices A 1394a device can transmit at what is known as S400 speed 400 Mbit s During a single bus cycle a device operating at S400 speed can transmit a single packet of up to 4096 bytes Alternatively several devices operating at S400 speed can transmit packets during a single bus cycle as long as the sum of the bytes in the packets is 4096 bytes or less A 1394b device can transmit at what is known as S800 speed 800 Mbit s During a single bus cycle a device operating at S800 speed can transmit a single packet of up to 8192 bytes Alternatively several devices operating at S800 speed can transmit packets during a single bus cycle as long as the sum of the bytes in the packets is 8192 bytes or less The next thing that we must consider in a bus that has mixed 1394a and 1394b devices is the speed at which each device will transmit A 1394a device will always be capable of transmitting at S400 speed on a mixed 1394a 1394b bus The 1394a device can transmit at slower speeds but we are assuming that you always want to transmit at the fastest speed A 1394b device will transmit at S800
29. The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector If you want to select the Standard Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector_Standard If you want to select the High Gain Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector_HighGain If you want to select the Auto Functions Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector_AutoFunctions You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the selector the camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have a single image acquisition pending Selecting the standard factory setup as the default set and then loading the default set into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases Selecting which factory setup will serve as the default set is only allowed when Basler scout 245 Standard Features 9 19 3 Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set into the Active Set If you have saved a configuration set into the camera s non volatile memory you can load the saved set from the camera s non volatile memory into the camera s active set When you do this the loaded set overwrites the parameters in
30. a 73 7 _ a 85 5 17 5 Photosensitive p 2 x M3 3 5 deep surface of the sensor k Top lt e N 2 x M3 4 5 deep 9 7 a 67 2 m Fig 21 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter Basler scout 25 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 2x M3 4 5 deep 26 Bottom 4 7 67 2 80 5 12 5 Photosensitive surface of the sensor Top AS 2x M3 4 5 deep 4 7 67 2 2x M3 4 deep 4 5 16 2x M3 4 5 deep ca 13 2x M3 3 5 deep Fig 22 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras with an Option CS mount Lens Adapter 26 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter is as shown in Figure 23 The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with an optional CS mount lens adapter is as shown in Figure 24 on page 28 0 25 0 75 e lt lt gt reference plane tolerance to the center of the tolerance to the reference planes lens mount optical axis 0 02 This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the photosensitive surface and i
31. a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the trigger ready output signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource_TriggerReady You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 6 2 on page 67 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 5 7 2 on page 60 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 7 1 on page 77 134 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 11 4 Trigger Ready Signal scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 fm fc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 7 11 3 on page 132 As described in an earlier section on these cameras the exposure for an image acquisition must not begin until readout of the previously acquired image has ended The camera supplies a Trigger Ready TrigR
32. finished Apply a rising edge of th xternally generated electrical signal ExASTrig signal to input line 1 on the camera Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 91 Image Acquisition Control 7 5 The Frame Start Trigger in Standard Mode This section only applies if the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 7 1 on page 77 The frame start trigger is used to begin frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status it will begin a frame acquisition each time it receives a frame start trigger signal Note that in order for the camera to be in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The Acquisition Mode parameter must be set correctly A proper
33. s parameter value If necessary set the target value If necessary set the auto function profile to define priorities between auto functions Enable the auto function by setting it to once or continuous For more information about the individual settings see the next sections that describe the individual auto functions 220 Basler scout Standard Features 9 11 2 Gain Auto Gain Auto is the automatic counterpart of the manual gain feature When the gain auto function is operational the Gain Raw All parameter value is automatically adjusted within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from Auto Function AOI is reached The gain auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 will not be used to control the image brightness Instead the current manual setting of the Gain Raw All parameter value will control the image brightness When the gain auto function is used the exposure auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature For more information about gain see Section 9 1 on page 181 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 9 11 4 on page 225 To use the gain auto function perform the following steps
34. see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 3 on page 83 Referring to the use case diagrams that appear in Section 7 8 on page 119 can help you understand the explanations of the acquistion start trigger Remember however that the diagrams apply to the standard mode Accordingly the acquisition start trigger shown in the diagrams is not available in legacy mode and the frame start trigger shown is equivalent to the acquisition start trigger in legacy mode Basler scout 103 Image Acquisition Control 7 6 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Legacy Mode The main parameter associated with the acquisition start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger has two available settings off and on 7 6 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off When the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera With the trigger mode set to off the way that the camera will operate the acquisition start trigger depends on the setting of the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame the camera will automatically generate a single acquisition start trigger signal whenever it receives an Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame the camer
35. sp cifi es dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique Life Support Applications These products are not designed for use in life support appliances devices or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury Basler customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Basler for any damages resulting from such improper use or sale Warranty Note Do not open the housing of the camera The warranty becomes void if the housing is opened All material in this publication is subject to change without notice and is copyright Basler Vision Technologies Contacting Basler Support Worldwide Europe Basler AG An der Strusbek 60 62 22926 Ahrensburg Germany Tel 49 4102 463 515 Fax 49 4102 463 599 bc support europe baslerweb com Americas Basler Inc 855 Springdale Drive Suite 203 Exton PA 19341 U S A Tel 1 610 280 0171 Fax 1 610 280 7608 bc support usa baslerweb com Asia Basler Asia Pte Ltd 8 Boon Lay Way 03 03 Tradehub 21 Singapore 609964 Tel 65 6425 0472 Fax 65 6425 0473 bc support asia baslerweb com www baslerweb com Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 000005 1 del iMOdelS nc2 cc lal bee Eb bhi eevee eee Gind see te Gh het ede bee Posed atin 1 1 2 General Specifi
36. 10000000 us scA1400 17fm fc 38 us 10000000 us scA1400 30fm fc 28 us 10000000 us scA1600 14fm fc 31 us 10000000 us scA1600 28fm fc 31 us 10000000 us Table 13 Minimum Allowed Exposure Time and Maximum Possible Exposure Time Exposure time can not only be manually set see below but can also be automatically adjusted Exposure Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart to manually setting an absolute exposure time The exposure auto function automatically adjusts the Auto Exposure Time Abs parameter value In contrast to the manually set absolute exposure time the automatically adjusted absolute exposure time is not restricted to multiples of the current exposure time base The automatic adjustment is not available when trigger width exposure mode is selected For more information about auto functions see Section 9 11 1 on page 214 For more information about the Exposure Auto function see Section 9 11 3 on page 223 116 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control For information on parameter settings for obtaining the maximum possible exposure time see Section 7 7 1 on page 117 7 7 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using Raw Settings When exposure time is set using raw values the exposure time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter and the second element is the Exposure Time Base The exposure t
37. 11 ms 100 shocks negative Vibration broad band random digital control each axis DIN EN 60068 2 64 15 500 Hz 0 05 PSD ESS standard profile 00 30 h Table 6 Mechanical Stress Tests The mechanical stress tests were performed with a dummy lens connected to a C mount The dummy lens was 35 mm long and had a mass of 66 g Using a heavier or longer lens requires an additional support for the lens Basler scout 33 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 6 Software Licensing Information The software in the camera includes the LWIP TCP IP implementation The copyright information for this implementation is as follows Copyright c 2001 2002 Swedish Institute of Computer Science All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARR
38. 257 trigger ready signal 100 112 132 trigger width exposure mode 100 112 troubleshooting CHAMNS Hite nice ce ETE 271 with the LED 0 c eeesseeeeeeeeeees 270 U USE case diagrams eee eeeee eters 119 user configuration Set cceeees 244 user Output selector cceeeeeeeeeeeees 68 user output value parameter 68 V ventilation 2 eeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaees 36 vertical DINNING ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 Viewer ere oeni a anasa 43 Voltage INPUT 2 eee esse ceeeseeeeeeeeeenenees 56 WwW white balance ccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 SCUING aA Ses ana 190 white balance auto see balance white auto Y YUV 422 YUYV packed pixel data TOMMAU oot AE ahd a ao aaia 161 YUV 422 YUYV packed pixel format 175 YUV 422 data range cece 174 YUV 422 packed pixel data format 161 YUV 422 packed pixel format 172 Basler scout
39. 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 fo Not used LSB Fig 40 User Output Value All Parameter Bits To set the state of multiple user settable output lines Use the User Output Value All parameter to set the state of multiple user settable outputs You can set the User Output Value All parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter Camera UserOutputValueAll SetValue 0x3 int64_t currentOutputState Camera UserOutputValueAll GetValue If you have the invert function enabled on an output line that is designated as user settable the user setting sets the state of the line before the inverter 6 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert You can set each individual output line to invert or not to invert the outgoing signal To set the invert function on an output line Use the Line Selector to select an output line Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line and to false to disable inversion You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Enable the inverter on output line 1 Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Outl
40. 327100 Packets per frame 3192 Packets per frame 39 9 Round the result up to 40 1 Max Frames s 40 x125 is Max Frames s 200 frames s Formula one returns the lowest value So in this case the limiting factor is the sensor readout time and the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate would be 85 4 frames per second 7 13 1 Effect of the Packet Size Setting on the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate After a camera acquires a frame the image data is read out from the sensor into a buffer Once the frame has been read out to the buffer the data is packetized and transmitted across the IEEE 1394b bus to your host PC A parameter called Packet Size determines the number of bytes of data that will be included in each packet transferred across the bus The minimum value for the Packet Size parameter is 1 and the maximum value is 8192 Normally the value of the Packet Size parameter is set to the maximum and at maximum the Packet Size parameter has no noticeable effect on the operation of the camera If you lower the value of the Packet Size parameter the amount of image data included in each packet transmitted across the bus will be lower This means that it will take more packets to transmit each frame and since the cycle time of the IEEE 1394b bus is fixed it also means that it will take more time to transmit each frame If you lower the Packet Size parameter enough the slower data transfer rate can begin to affect the maximum allowed
41. 5 1 3 Setting the Frame Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters 95 7 5 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 96 Z 572 1 Introduction i sscea rii ed es Ge eee ee ga dae es eda eee 96 7 5 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 97 7 5 3 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 98 TODA Introduction 22 vs fee a a hes noe CRE EE a Ae 98 7 5 3 2 Exposure Modes 0 00 cece eee 99 7 5 3 3 Frame Start Trigger Delay 0 0 0 0 101 7 5 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 101 7 6 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Legacy Mode 0 cee eee ee 103 7 6 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Legacy Mode 00 5 104 7 6 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off 0 0 104 7 6 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On 2 000 105 7 6 1 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters 2 3 s08 20000 bene nwe esa eea EEEn iE aes 106 7 6 2 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 107 76 21 Introduction 4 026 20062 cl seen eee gee eb bae dvea ee eee danas 107 7 6 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 108 7 6 3 Using
42. 70fm fc scA640 74fm fc scA640 120fm fc Sensor Size fm 659 x 494 fm 659 x 494 fm 659 x 494 H x V pixels fc 658 x 492 fc 658 x 492 fc 658 x 492 Sensor Type Sony ICX424 AL AQ Sony ICX414 AL AQ Sony ICX618 ALA AQA Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 3 1 2 1 4 Pixel Size 7 4 um x 7 4 um 9 9 um x 9 9 um 5 6 um x 5 6 um Max Frame Rate 71 fps 74 fps 120 fos at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type IEEE 1394b Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 8 to 36 VDC supplied via the IEEE 1394 cable lt 1 ripple 25W 12V 30W 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional 2 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA640 70fm fc scA640 74fm fc scA640 120fm fc Size L x W x H standard housing
43. Acquisition Start command must be applied to the camera A proper acquisition start trigger signal must be applied to the camera if the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on For more information about the Acquisition Mode parameter and about Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 3 on page 83 For more information about the acquisition start trigger and about the acquisition status see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 4 on page 85 Referring to the use case diagrams that appear in Section 7 8 on page 119 can help you understand the explanations of the frame start trigger 92 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 5 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode The main parameter associated with the frame start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger has two available settings off and on 7 5 1 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Off When the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera With the trigger mode set to off the way that the camera will operate the frame start trigger depends on the setting of the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame the camera will automatically generat
44. Bo Low byte of blue value for Po Bo Low byte of green value for Po B High byte of blue value for Pg B High byte of green value for Po Bo Low byte of green value for P Bo Low byte of red value for P B3 High byte of green value for P4 B3 High byte of red value for P4 B4 Low byte of blue value for P B4 Low byte of green value for Po Bs High byte of blue value for Po Bs High byte of green value for P3 Be Low byte of green value for P3 Be Low byte of red value for P3 B7 High byte of green value for P3 B7 High byte of red value for P3 Bm 7 Low byte of blue value for Ph 3 Bm 7 Low byte of green value for Pp 3 Bm 6 High byte of blue value for P 3 Bm 6 High byte of green value for P 3 168 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats Bm 5 Low byte of green value for Ph 2 Bm 5 Low byte of red value for Ph 2 Bm 4 High byte of green value for Pp Bm 4 High byte of red value for Pp Bm 3 Low byte of blue value for P Bm 3 Low byte of green value for P 4 Bm 2 High byte of blue value for P Bm 2 High byte of green value for P Bm 1 Low byte of green value for Ph Bm 1 Low byte of red value for Ph Bm High byte of green value for Ph Bm High byte of red value for Ph When the camera is set for Bayer BG 16 the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the unsigned short little endian type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal level
45. Bo Red value for P4 bits 11 4 B3 Green value for Ps bits 11 4 By Red value for P3 bits 3 0 Green value for P3 bits 3 0 Bs Red value for P3 bits 11 4 Be Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B7 Red value for Ps bits 3 0 Green value for P4 bits 3 0 Bg Red value for Ps bits 11 4 e e e e e e Bm 5 Green value for P 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Red value for P bits 3 0 Green value for P 3 bits 3 Bm 3 Red value for Pp bits 11 4 Bm 2 Green value for Ph 1 bits 11 4 Bm 1 Red value for P bits 3 0 Green value for P bits 3 Bm Red value for P bits 11 4 Pixel Data Formats When a color camera is set for Bayer BG 12 Packed the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the unsigned type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 Basler scout 171 Pixel Data Formats 8 3 6 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 When a color camera is set for the YUV 422 Packed pixel data format each pixel in the captured image goes through a two step conversion process as it exits the sensor and passes through the camera s electronics This process yields Y U and V color information for each pixel In the first
46. DCAM Raw 8 When a color camera is set for the Bayer RG 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 8 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 8 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 8 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The RG in the name Bayer RG 8 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even lines in the images pixel one will be red pixel two will be green pixel three will be red pixel four will be green etc For odd lines in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be blue pixel three will be green pixel four will be blue etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 8 3 1 on page 162 The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer RG 8 output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera a line Bg the first byte of data for a line Bm the last byte of data for a line
47. For more information about controlling exposure time when using a hardware trigger see Section 7 4 5 on page 90 For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116 7 5 1 3 Setting the Frame Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and related parameter values for the frame start trigger from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API If your settings make it necessary you can also set the Trigger Source parameter The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger to on and the Trigger Source to input line 1 Select the frame start trigger Camera Set Camera Set Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameStart the mode for the selected trigger TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On the source for the selected trigger TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode to continuous the Trigger Mode to off and the Acquisition Frame Rate to 60 Set Camera Sel the acquisition mode to continuous frame AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous j Camera Set Camera Set ct the frame start trigger TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameStart the mode for the selected trigger TriggerMode SetVal
48. For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 7 13 on page 143 and Section 7 14 on page 148 96 Basler scout 7 5 2 2 Image Acquisition Control Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Trig gering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software frame start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode In this example the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger will be set to off Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with software frame start trigger signals within the limits imposed by other parameter settings Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue fals Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue Tr
49. Frame Start FrameStartOvertriggerEventData FrameStartOvertriggerEventStreamChannellndex Overtrigger FrameStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp Exposure End ExposureEndEventData ExposureEndEventFramelD ExposureEndEventStreamChannellndex ExposureEndEventTimestamp Event Overrun EventOverrunEventData EventOverrunEventStreamChannellndex EventOverrunEventTimestamp Table 21 Parameter Names of Events and Supplementary Information You can enable event reporting and make the additional settings from within your application software by using the pylon API For more information see the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit For more detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference 236 Basler scout Standard Features 9 17 Test Images All cameras include the ability to generate test images Test images are used to check the camera s basic functionality and its ability to transmit an image to the host PC Test images can be used for service purposes and for failure diagnostics For test images the image is generated internally by the camera s logic and does not use the optics the imaging sensor or the ADC Six test images are available The Effect of Camera Settings on Test Images When any of the test image is active the camera s analog features such as gain black level and exposure time have no e
50. N 1 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Time Fig 61 Trigger Ready Signal You should be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is enabled the operation of the trigger ready signal will be influenced by the value of the parameter If the value of the parameter is greater than zero but less than the maximum allowed the trigger ready will go high at the rate specified by the parameter value For example if the parameter is set to 10 the trigger ready signal will go high 10 times per second If the value of the parameter is greater than the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with the current camera settings the trigger ready signal will work as described above and will go high at a point that represents the maximum acquisition frame rate allowed the camera will simply ignore the attempt The trigger ready signal will only be available when hardware triggering is enabled If you attempt to start an image acquisition when the trigger ready signal is low Basler scout 133 Image Acquisition Control By default the trigger ready signal is assigned to physical output line 2 on the camera However the assignment of the trigger signal to a physical output line can be changed Selecting the Trigger Ready Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The trigger ready signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting
51. Size fm 1034 x 779 fm 1296 x 966 fm 1392 x 1040 H x V pixels fc 1032 x 778 fo 1294 x 964 fc 1390 x 1038 Sensor Type Sony ICX204 AL AK Sony ICX445 ALA AQA Sony ICX267 AL AK Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 3 1 3 1 2 Pixel Size 4 65 um x 4 65 um 3 75 um x 3 75 um 4 65 um x 4 65 um Max Frame Rate 30 fps 33 fps 17 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type IEEE 1394b Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 8 to 36 VDC supplied via the IEEE 1394 cable lt 1 ripple 25W 12V 30W 12V 2 75W 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA1000 30fm fc scA1300 32fm fc scA1390 17 fm fc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 m
52. The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI1 See the Auto Function AOI section above Setting the limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value the set parameter values serve as examples Setting the target average gray value A medium gray value is selected as an example Enabling the exposure auto function and selecting for example the continuous mode of operation Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI1 is predefined to gather luminance statistics Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOIl1 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Set exposure time limits for luminance control Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsLowerLimit SetValue 1000 Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsUpperLimit SetValue 1 0E6 Set target value for luminance control This is always expressed by an 8 bit value regardless of the current pixel format i e 0 gt black 255 gt white Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue 128 Set mode of operation for exposure auto function
53. The acquisition status can be determined for the acquisition start trigger Determining the Acquisition Status To determine the acquisition status of the camera Use the Acquisition Status Selector to select the Frame Trigger Wait status The Frame Trigger Wait parameter also applies when operating the camera in legacy mode where actually the status of the acquisition start trigger is determined Read the value of the AcquisitionStatus parameter Standard mode If the value is set to false the camera is not ready to receive a frame start trigger if the value is set to true the camera is ready to receive a frame start trigger Legacy mode If the value is set to false the camera is not ready to receive an acquisition start trigger if the value is set to true the camera is ready to receive an acquisition start trigger You can set the Acquisition Status Selector and read the AcquisitionStatus parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set and read the parameter values Set the Acquisition Status Selector Camera AcquisitionStatusSelector SetValue AcquisitionStatusSelector_FrameTriggerWait Read the acquisition status bool IsWaitingForFrameTrigger Camera AcquisitionStatus GetValue j For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Bas
54. The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the auto function profile As an example Gain Auto is set to be minimized during adjustments Use the gain auto and exposure auto features simultaneously Camera AutoFunctionProfile SetValue AutoFunctionProfile_GainMinimum Camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto_Continuous Camera ExposureAuto SetValue ExposureAuto_Continuous For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler scout 225 Standard Features 9 11 5 Balance White Auto Balance White Auto is the automatic counterpart to manually setting the white balance The balance white auto function is only available on color models Automatic white balancing is a two step process First the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 5 Then assuming a gray world model the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values are automatically adjusted such that the average values for the red and blue pixels match the average value for the green pixels The balance white auto function uses Auto Function AOI 2 and can only be operated in the once mode of operation If Auto Function AOI 2 does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI 2 will not be used to control the
55. There are several checks and precautions that you must follow before using the digital shift feature The checks and precautions differ depending on whether the camera will be set for a 12 bit pixel format or for an 8 bit pixel format in your application If you will be using a 12 bit pixel format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 12 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 2048 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 2048 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 1024 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If all of the readings are below 512 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 256 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings If you will be using an 8 bit format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 8 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 128 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 128 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 64 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If
56. Trigger Assuming that an acquisition start trigger signal has just been applied to the camera the camera will exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Applying a frame start trigger signal to the camera at this point will exit the camera from the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status and will begin the 80 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control process of exposing and reading out a frame see Figure 43 on page 81 As soon as the camera is ready to accept another frame start trigger signal it will return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A new frame start trigger signal can then be applied to the camera to begin another frame exposure The frame start trigger has two modes off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera The rate at which the camera will generate the signals and acquire frames will be determined by the way that you set several frame rate related parameters If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on you must trigger frame start by applying frame start trigger signals to the camera Each time a trigger signal is applied the camera will begin a frame exposure When frame start
57. You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the line status all chunk run the parser and retrieve the line status all chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Line Status All chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_LineStatusAll Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true Basler scout 259 Chunk Features retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64_t lineStatusAll Camera ChunkLineStatusAll GetValue j For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 260 Basler scout Chunk Features 10 7 CRC Checksum The CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Checksum feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a CRC checksum calculated using the Z modem method As shown in Figure 6 2 the checksum is calculated using all of the image data and all of the appended chunks except for the checksum itself The CRC chunk is always the last chunk
58. able to acquire frames Setting the Acquisition Mode and Issuing Start Stop Commands You can set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and you can execute Acquisition Start or Acquisition Stop commands from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The code snippet below illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and to execute an Acquisition Start command Note that the snippet also illustrates setting several parameters regarding frame triggering These parameters are discussed later in this chapter Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_SingleFrame Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameStart Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation_RisingEdge Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_Timed Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Basler scout 83 Image Acquisition Control Camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved This is true because the camera performs a complete internal setup cycle for each single frame and because it cannot be operated with overlapped exposure the scA750 60 does no
59. acquisition mode When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible To determine the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with your current camera settings you can read the value of the camera s Resulting Frame Rate parameter This parameter indicates the camera s current maximum allowed frame rate taking the AOI exposure time and packet size settings into account You can read the current value of the Resulting Frame RateAbs parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to get the parameter values Resulting Framerate double resultingFps Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about the AOI settings see Section 9 6 on page 198 148 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate You may find that you would like to acquire frames at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with the camera s current settings In this case you must first use the two formulas described below to determine what factor is restricting the maximum frame rate the most Next you must try t
60. appended to the image data CRC checksum is calculated on this data Image Data ChunkX ChunkY Chunk including any required padding Data Data CRC Fig 83 CRC Checksum of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all chunk The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the CRC feature or any features To enable the CRC checksum chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the CRC chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the CRC chunk is enabled the camera will add a CRC chunk to each acquired image To retrieve CRC information from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the CRC information Note that the CRC information provided by the chunk parser is not the CRC checksum itself Rather it is a true false result When the image and appended chunks pass through the parser the parser calculates a CRC checksum based on the received image and chunk information It then compares the calculated CRC checksum with the CRC checksum contained in the CRC checksum chunk If the two match the result will indicate that the image data is OK If the two do not match the result will indicate that the image is corrupted You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter v
61. be disabled on the Gain feature Disabling Parameter Limits To disable the limits for a parameter Use the Parameter Selector to select the parameter whose limits you wish to disable Set the value of the Remove Limits parameter You can set the Parameter Selector and the value of the Remove Limits parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the feature whose factory limits will be disabled Camera ParameterSelector SetValue ParameterSelector_Gain Disable the limits for the selected featur Camera RemoveLimits SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Note that the disable parameter limits feature will only be available at the guru viewing level For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 228 Basler scout Standard Features 9 13 Debouncer The debouncer feature aids in discriminating between valid and invalid input signals and only lets valid signals pass to the camera The debouncer value specifies the minimum time that an input signal must remain high or remain low in order to be considered a valid input signal We recommend setting the debouncer value so
62. code snippets illustrate using the API to select an Auto Function AOI and to get the maximum allowed settings for the Width and Height parameters The code snippets also illustrate setting the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values As an example Auto Function AOI1 is selected Basler scout 219 Standard Features Select the appropriate auto function AOI for gain auto and exposure auto control Currently auto function AOI 1 is predefined to gather the pixel data needed for gain auto and exposure auto control Set Camera Camera Camera Camera Camera the position and size of the auto function AOI AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI1 AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue 0 AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax AutoFunctionAOTHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 9 11 1 3 Using an Auto Function To use an auto function carry out the following steps OPS Be Bo oS Select the Auto Function AOI that is related to the auto function you want to use Set the position and size of the Auto Function AOI If necessary set the lower and upper limits for the auto functions
63. double resultingFps Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about using multiple cameras on a single bus see Section 11 on page 263 Basler scout 147 Image Acquisition Control 7 14 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 fm fc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 7 13 on page 143 In general the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate can be limited by two factors The sum of the exposure time plus the amount of time it takes to read the acquired image out of the imaging sensor and into the camera s frame buffer An acquired image is also known as a frame The exposure time is set by the user If you use very long exposure times you can acquire fewer frames per second The readout time varies depending on the height of the frame Shorter frames take less time to read out of the sensor The frame height is determined by the camera s AOI Height settings The number of packets needed to transfer an acquired frame from the camera to your PC acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous
64. exposure time parameter and select the exposure mode set for the timed exposure mode set exposure time to 3000 us Camera ExposureMode SetValu ExposureMode_Timed Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 set for the width exposure mode set minimum exposure time to 3000 us Camera ExposureMode SetValu ExposureMode_TriggerWidth Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 7 6 3 3 Acquisition Start Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware acquisition start trigger and when the trigger will become effective The trigger delay will not operate if the Trigger Mode parameter for acquisition start is set to off or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger For more information about the trigger delay feature and how to set it see Section 9 14 on page 231 Basler scout 113 Image Acquisition Control 7 6 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware acquisition start tri
65. for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 on the camera will act as the acquisition start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExASTrig signal can be used to trigger frame acquisition The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status frame acquisition will start whenever the appropriate edge transition is received by the camera When the camera receives a hardware trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new Basler scout 109 Image Acquisition Control acquisition start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new acquisition start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When the camera is operating under control of an ExASTrig signal the period of the ExASTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is acquiring frames 1 __ ________ Frame Rate ExASTrig per
66. frame capture rate of your camera If you look at the formulas the previous section you will notice that one of the factors that can limit the maximum allowed frame rate is the number of packets needed to transmit a frame The number of packets per frame is directly related to the Packet Size parameter setting You can see the effect of changing the Packet Size parameter by looking at the read only parameter called Resulting Frame Rate Abs The Resulting Frame Rate Abs parameter indicates the 146 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control maximum frame rate with the current camera settings If you gradually decrease the setting for the Packet Size parameter you will eventually find that the value of the Resulting Frame Rate Abs parameter will also decrease If you are operating a single camera on your IEEE 1394b bus you would ordinarily leave the Packet Size parameter set at the maximum However if you are operating multiple cameras on a single IEEE 1394b bus you will probably need to change the Packet Size parameter so that the cameras can effectively share the available bus bandwidth You can set the value of the Packet Size parameter and read the current value of the resulting Frame Rate parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to work with the parameter values Set packet siz Camera PacketSize SetValue 4096 Get resulting framerate
67. in Section 5 2 2 on page 51 Added Section 5 4 3 on page 55 and notes in Section 5 4 2 on page 49 introducing the PLC cable Included detailed voltage information in Section 5 6 on page 52 Section 5 7 1 1 on page 57 and Section 5 7 2 1 on page 60 Modified the absolute maximum rating to 30 VDC in Section 5 7 1 2 on page 59 and Section 5 7 2 2 on page 60 Added a note relating to the debouncer in Section 7 12 on page 141 Updated the black level feature description and the Black Level Raw parameter range for the scA1400 30 in Section 9 2 on page 188 Corrected the minimum value for the white balance ratio in Section 9 3 on page 190 Corrected the name of the Gamma parameter in Section 9 10 on page 213 The Gamma parameter was incorrectly referred to as the Gamma Raw parameter Included the Auto Functions section on page 214 and added related information in other parts of the manual Extended the description of the debouncer in Section 9 13 on page 229 Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual AW00012509000 22 Aug 2008 Updated contact addresses and phone numbers Official release of the auto functions Basler scout 283 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00012510000 18 Feb 2009 Integrated information for the scA640 120fm fc Added a note to Section 1 7 on page 35 indicating than an application note regarding EMI ESD control is available The text in sections Secti
68. is set to a low value and all auto functions are set to off The High Gain Factory Setup is similar to the standard factory setup but the gain ist set to 6dB The Auto Fubnctions Factory Setup is similar to the standard factory setup but the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions are both enabled and are set to the continuous mode of operation During automatic parameter adjustment gain will be kept to a minimum The factory setups are saved in permanent files in the camera s non volatile memory They are not lost when the camera is reset or switched off and they cannot be changed You can select one of the three factory setups to be the camera s default configuration set Instructions for selecting which factory setup will be used as the default set appear below Note that your selection of which factory setup will serve as the default set will not be lost when the camera is reset or switched off The default configuration set can be loaded into the active set The default configuration set can also be selected as the camera s startup set Instructions for loading the default set into the active set and for selecting the startup set appear below Basler scout 243 Standard Features User Configuration Sets As mentioned above the active configuration set is stored in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The camera can save most of the settin
69. ls See ae eet 43 4 Functional DESCripllOn niin owe tin ian cele cwy ese tenee nnne 45 4 1 Overview All Models Except scA750 60 n nannaa 0000 cee 45 4 2 Overview scA750 60 Only 00 000 eee 47 5 Physical interlace 64 cciwe eerie age 608 eee hee ae he ee ere 49 5 1 General Description of the Connections 0 00 cee eee 49 5 2 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering 0 0000 eee 50 5 2 1 IEEE 1394b Socket Pin Assignments 0 0 00 cee ee eee 50 5 2 2 12 pin Receptacle Pin Assignments 000 ee eee eee eee 51 5 29 sPIRNUMbDOSrAG enean aranean ds eee eh enna ad Shanes eee ks ecto 51 5 3 Connector Types ccc ead bee eee aa Eai aa ee ee a tees 52 5 3 1 IEEE 1394b Connector oeenn aa eee a i aA eee 52 5 3 2 12 pin CONNEC T rnici e cake ee aa eee a a ee ee 52 5 4 Cabling Requirements 0 0 ee eee 53 5 41 IEEE 1394b Cable 14 vetoed cviceni ach bee kev et Aas eee eed 53 5 4 2 Standard I O Cable 2 eee 53 Basler scout i Table of Contents 54 34 PLC VO Cablen 223 SR eR CRA eee an ee AAO 55 5 5 IEEE 1394b Device Information 000 cece ee 55 5 60 Camera POWER x e s escola ale yen Pe aed eee Ei deb Se Dea 56 5 7 Input and Output Lines 2 6 0 tees 57 BZA Input LINES ee ie LAA aoe Ss be Ree SA dead ae mee ed 57 5 7 1 1 Voltage Requirements 0 00 ee 57 5 7 1 2 Line Schematic diass cers 0 0 00 cece 59 5 7 2 OuUUtLINGS edie bod
70. more information about controlling exposure time when using a hardware trigger see Section 7 4 5 on page 90 For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116 7 6 1 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and related parameter values for the frame start trigger from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API If your settings make it necessary you can also set the Trigger Source parameter The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger to on and the Trigger Source to input line 1 Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode to continuous the Trigger Mode to off and the Acquisition Frame Rate to 60 Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_Off Se
71. oe tule bEmm eRe ee Cee ted 281 Index efi eck ga OC A aie oh rae AA Oak a a ie ot ah eel 287 vi Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions This chapter lists the camera models covered by the manual It provides the general specifications for those models and the basic requirements for using them This chapter also includes specific precautions that you should keep in mind when using the cameras We strongly recommend that you read and follow the precautions 1 1 Models The current Basler IEEE 1394 camera models are listed in the top row of the specification tables on the next pages of this manual The camera models are differentiated by their sensor size their maximum frame rate at full resolution and whether the camera s sensor is mono or color The scout camera models are available in the following housing variants standard housing 90 head housing The housing variants other than the standard housing are appended to the camera s name e g scA640 70fm fc 90 head Unless otherwise noted the material in this manual applies to all of the camera models listed in the tables Material that only applies to a particular camera model or to a subset of models such as to color cameras or a specific housing variant only will be so designated Basler scout 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 2 General Specifications Specification scA640
72. on how the Acquisition Start command operates If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame you can only acquire one frame after executing an Acquisition Start command When one frame has been acquired the Acquisition Start command will expire Before attempting to acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame an Acquisition Start command does not expire after a single frame is captured Once an Acquisition Start command has been executed you can acquire as many frames as you like The Acquisition Start command will remain in effect until you execute an Acquisition Stop command Once an Acquisition Stop command has been executed the camera will not be able to acquire frames until a new Acquisition Start command is executed Acquisition Start Trigger The acquisition start trigger is essentially an enabler for the frame start trigger The acquisition start trigger has two modes of operation off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the initial acquisition status of the camera will be waiting for acquisition start trigger see Figure 43 on page 81 When t
73. only transfer pixel data from within the area defined by your settings Information from the pixels outside of the area of interest is discarded Column 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Row 0 1 2 Y 3 Offset 5 A 6 7 8 9 Height 9 Mon 1 E 12 I 13 a The camera will only 15 transmit the 16 pixel data 17 from this 18 i area 19 L LI 1 LI LO ao X Offset a gt Width Fig 67 Area of Interest One of the main advantages of the AOI feature is that decreasing the height of the AOI can increase the camera s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate For more information about how changing the AOI height affects the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 7 13 on page 143 198 Basler scout Standard Features Setting the AOI Except for the scA1300 32 and scA1600 28 cameras the AOI is set by default to use the full resolution of the camera s sensor For the scA1300 32 cameras the default resolution is set to 1280 x 960 pixels for mono models and to 1278 x 958 pixels for color models For the scA1600 28 ca
74. passes through only 1394b devices Basler scout 265 Using Multiple Cameras on a Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth 1394a 1394a 1394b Adapter Adapter Adapter 400 400 S800 1394b 1394b Adapter Adapter S800 S800 1394a Hub 1394b Hub S400 S800 1 2 3 1394a 1394b 1394b Camera Camera Camera Transmits Transmits Transmits at S400 at S400 at S800 6 7 1394a 1394b Camera Camera Transmits Transmits at S400 at S800 Fig 85 Examples of Mixed Device Types the current network configuration This behavior of the driver can t be changed by The driver will always set each device to operate at the fastest possible speed for the user So what does all of this mean when we are trying to share bandwidth between devices operating at different speeds on the same bus Some examples will provide the best explanation Example 1 Assume that you have two cameras on the bus and that you want them to capture and transmit images simultaneously Camera 1 is operating at S400 speed and the camera 2 is operating at S800 speed Also assume that you want camera one to use 40 of the available bandwidth and camera 2 to use 60 How would you set the packet size on the cameras so that each one would use the desired portion of the bandwidth available in each bus cycle For camera 1 the calculation would be 0 40 x 4096 1638 4 bytes per packet the packet size must be set to a multiple of 4 so we would round the sett
75. property of the entire image Different degrees of overlap are illustrated in Figure 77 The hatched areas in the figure indicate areas of overlap If the Auto Function AOI is completely included in the Image AOI see a in Figure 77 the pixel data from the Auto Function AOI will be used to control the image property If the Image AOI is completely included in the Auto Function AOI see b in Figure 77 only the pixel data from the Image AOI will be used to control the image property If the Image AOI only partially overlaps the Auto Function AOI see c in Figure 77 only the pixel data from the area of partial overlap will be used to control the image property If the Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI see d in Figure 77 the Auto Function will not or only to a limited degree control the image property For details see the sections below describing the individual auto functions We strongly recommend completely including the Auto Function AOI within the Image AOI or depending on your needs choosing identical positions and sizes for Auto Function AOI and Image AOI You can use auto functions when also using the reverse X feature For information about the behavior and roles of Auto Function AOI and Image AOI when also using the reverse X feature see the Reverse X section Basler scout 217 Standard Features 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2
76. see Figure 28 on page 46 The charges from the bottom line of pixels in the array are then moved into a horizontal shift register Next the charges are shifted out of the horizontal register As the charges move out of the horizontal shift register they are converted to voltages proportional to the size of each charge Each voltage is then amplified by a Variable Gain Control VGC and digitized by an Analog to Digital converter ADC After each voltage has been amplified and digitized it passes through an FPGA and into an image buffer All shifting is clocked according to the camera s internal data rate Shifting continues in a linewise fashion until all image data has been read out of the sensor The pixel data leaves the image buffer and passes back through the FPGA to an IEEE1394b link layer controller where it is assembled into data packets The packets are passed to a 1394b physical layer controller which transmits them isochronously to an interface board in the host PC The physical and link layer controllers also handle transmission and receipt of asynchronous control data such as changes to the camera s parameters The image buffer between the sensor and the link layer controller allows data to be read out of the sensor at a rate that is independent of the data transmission rate between the camera and the host computer This ensures that the data transmission rate has no influence on image quality Basler scout 45 Functional Descrip
77. selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by executing an Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger on the host PC Line 1 When the source signal is set to line 1 you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to Line 1 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger 86 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter must be set to continuous trigger Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 4 on page 85 By default input line 2 is selected as the sour
78. set for Mono 8 The U and V values transmitted will always be zero With this format a Y value is transmitted for each pixel but the U and V values are only transmitted for every second pixel The order of the pixel data for a received frame in the image buffer in your PC is similar to the order of YUV 4 2 2 Packed output from a color camera For more information about the YUV 4 2 2 Packed format on color cameras see Section 8 3 6 on page 172 8 2 5 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed pixel data format the camera transmits Y U and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed The Y value transmitted for each pixel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data transmitted when a monochrome camera is set for Mono 8 The U and V values transmitted will always be zero With this format a Y value is transmitted for each pixel but the U and V values are only transmitted for every second pixel The order of the pixel data for a received frame in the image buffer in your PC is similar to the order of YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed output from a color camera For more information about the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed format on color cameras see Section 8 3 7 on page 175 Basler scout 161 Pixel Data Formats 8 3 Pixel Data Output Formats for Color Cameras 8 3 1 The Bayer Color Filter The sensor used in color models
79. setting the digital shift feature 9 4 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses a 12 bit ADC to digitize the output from the imaging sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 12 bit UE Saat Ree oe eee ap See E O effective depth by default the camera transmits the 12 bits that are output from the ADC ADC B No Shift B Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 0 from the ADC ADC along with a zero as an LSB bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting once is that the output of the 10 9 8 7 65432 1 0 camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is Y viewing a uniform white target and that under these S S conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 100 I lt SNEL Once If you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 200 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the least significant bit output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that no odd gray values can be output and that the gray value scale will Basler scout 191 Standard Features only include values of 2 4 6 8 10 and so on This absence of some gray values is commonly referred to as missing codes I
80. signal will act as the frame start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame start trigger For more information about using a software trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 7 4 4 on page 89 For more information about using a hardware trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 7 4 5 on page 90 Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start triggers when it is ina waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 4 on page 85 By default input line 1 is selected as the source signal for the frame start trigger Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to one of the input lines the exposure time for each frame acquisition can be controlled with the exposure time parameters or it can be controlled by manipulating the hardware trigger signal For more information about controlling exposure time when using a software trigger see Section 7 4 4 on page 89 94 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control
81. speed if all of the devices in its path to the host PC including the adapter card in the PC are 1394b devices If the path to the PC passes through any 1394a device then the 1394b device will transmit at S400 speed Figure 85 illustrates some situations where 1394a devices and 1394b devices are mixed on a single bus If you look at the figure you will notice Camera 1 will transmit image data at S400 speed This is simply because the camera itself is a 1394a device and S400 is the maximum speed for 1394a devices Camera 2 will transmit image data at S400 speed The camera is a 1394b device which means that it is capable of S800 speed But the camera s path to the host PC passes through a 1394a adapter so this limits the camera s actual maximum speed to S400 Camera 3 will transmit image data at S800 speed This is because the camera is a 1394b device and its path to the host PC passes through only 1394b devices Camera 4 will transmit image data at S400 speed This is simply because the camera itself is a 1394a device Camera 5 will transmit image data at S400 speed The camera is a 1394b device but its path to the host PC passes through a 1394a hub so this limits the camera s maximum speed to 400 Camera 6 will transmit image data at S400 speed This is simply because the camera itself is a 1394a device Camera 7 will transmit image data at S800 speed This is because the camera is a 1394b device and its path to the host PC
82. start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExFSTrig signal can be used to trigger frame acquisition The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame acquisition will start whenever the appropriate edge transition is received by the camera When the camera receives a hardware trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When the camera is operating under control of an ExFSTrig signal the period of the ExFSTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is acquiring frames 1 __________ Frame Rate ExFSTrig period in seconds For example if you are operating a camera with an ExFSTrig signal period of 20 ms 0 020 s oe oe f goz 0ps So in this case the frame rate is 50 fps acquire frames at too high a rate some of the frame trigger signals that you apply will be received by the camera when it is
83. that the conveyor speed varies and that they do not want to acquire images when there is no object in front of the camera A sensing device on the conveyor could be used in conjunction with a PC to determine when an object is starting to pass the camera When an object is starting to pass the PC will execute an acquisition start trigger software command causing the camera to exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status An electrical device attached to the conveyor could be used to generate frame start trigger signals and to apply them to input line 1 on the camera Assuming that this electrical device was based on a position encoder it could account for the speed changes in the conveyor and ensure that frame trigger signals are generated and applied when specific areas of the object are in front of the camera Once 3 frame start trigger signals have been received by the camera the number of frames acquired would be equal to the setting for the Acquisition Frame Count parameter and the camera would return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Any frame start trigger signals generated at that point would be ignored This sort of setup is useful because it will only acquire frames when there is an object in front of the camera and it will ensure that the desired areas on the object are imaged Transmitting images of the space between
84. the active set Since the settings in the active set control the current operation of the camera the settings from the loaded set will now be controlling the camera You can also load the default set into the camera s active set To load a saved configuration set or the default set from the camera s non volatile memory into the active set Set the User Set Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or Default Execute a User Set Load command to load the selected set into the active set You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Load command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and execute the command Camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector_UserSet2 Camera UserSetLoad Execute camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have a single image acquisition pending Loading the Default Set with the Standard Factory Setup selected into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases Loading a user set or the default set into the active set is only allowed when the 246 Basler scout Standard Features 9 19 4 Selecting the Startup S
85. the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI1 is predefined to gather luminance statistics Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOIl1 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetxX SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Select gain for automatic luminance control Set gain limits for luminance control Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector_All Camera AutoGainRawLowerLimit SetValue Camera GainRaw GetMin Camera AutoGainRawUpperLimit SetValue Camera GainRaw GetMax Set target value for luminance control This is always expressed by an 8 bit value regardless of the current pixel format i e 0 gt black 255 gt white Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue 128 Set mode of operation for gain auto function Camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto_Once For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 9 11 1 on page 214 For information about Auto Function AOls and how to
86. the camera Acquisition Start Trigger Software Command Executed Frame Start Trigger Signal applied to line 1 is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Start Command Executed XXIII LSLE ZA A Time Fig 56 Use Case 4 Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Acquisition Stop Command Executed LOCOCO OOOO OOO OO OOOO RRRS 127 Image Acquisition Control 7 9 Overlapping Exposure and Sensor Readout All Models Except scA750 60 Note The information in this section applies to all camera models except the scA750 60 fm fc For information about scA750 60 fm fc cameras see Section 7 10 on page 130 The image acquisition process on the camera includes two distinct parts The first part is the exposure of the pixels in the imaging sensor Once exposure is complete the second part of the process readout of the pixel values from the sensor takes place In regard to this image acquisition process there are two common ways for the camera to operate with non overlapped exposure and with overlapped exposure In the non overlapped mode of operation each time an image is acquired the camera completes the entire exposure readout process before acquisition of the next image is started This situation is illustrated in Figure 57 Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Rea
87. the converted value and will transmit the 8 most significant bits Changing the Values in the Luminance Lookup Table and Enabling the Table You can change the values in the luminance lookup table LUT and enable the use of the lookup table by doing the following Use the LUT Selector to select a lookup table Currently there is only one lookup table available i e the luminance lookup table described above Use the LUT Index parameter to select a value in the lookup table The LUT Index parameter selects the value in the table to change The index number for the first value in the table is 0 for the second value in the table is 1 for the third value in the table is 2 and so on Use the LUT Value parameter to set the selected value in the lookup table Use the LUT Index parameter and LUT value parameters to set other table values as desired Use the LUT Enable parameter to enable the table You can set the LUT Selector the LUT Index parameter and the LUT Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Select the lookup table Camera LUTSelector SetValue LUTSelector_Luminance Write a lookup table to the device The following lookup table causes an inversion of the sensor values bright gt dark dark gt bright for int i 0 i lt 4096 i 8 Camera LUTIndex S
88. the objects would be a waste of bandwidth and processing them would be a waste of processor resources 126 Basler scout Settings Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On The acquisition start trigger is on and the acquisition start trigger source is set to software The user must execute an acquisition start trigger software command to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status after 3 frame trigger signals have been applied The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply a frame start trigger signal to input line 1 to start each frame exposure Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger On Trigger Source for the acquisition start trigger Software Acquisition Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge aitrigger signal applied by the user PSS camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal j camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame transmission a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because
89. the setting for the Packet Size parameter you will eventually find that the value of the Resulting Frame Rate Abs parameter will also decrease If you are operating a single camera on your IEEE 1394b bus you would ordinarily leave the Packet Size parameter set at the maximum However if you are operating multiple cameras on a single IEEE 1394b bus you will probably need to change the Packet Size parameter so that the cameras can effectively share the available bus bandwidth You can set the value of the Packet Size parameter and read the current value of the resulting Frame Rate parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to work with the parameter values Set packet siz Camera PacketSize SetValue 4096 Get resulting framerate double resultingFps Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about using multiple cameras on a single bus see Section 11 on page 263 Basler scout 151 Image Acquisition Control 152 Basler scout 8 Pixel Data Formats Pixel Data Formats By selecting a pixel data format you determine the format layout of the image data transmitted by the camera This section provides detailed informa
90. these cameras do cameras is not recommended Test Image 4 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 8 bit The basic appearance of test image 4 is similar to test image 2 the 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 4 and test image 2 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 4 will show the effects of the feature while test image 2 will not This makes test image 4 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table Test Image 5 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 12 bit The basic appearance of test image 5 is similar to test image 3 the 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 5 and test image 3 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 5 will show the effects of the feature while test image 3 will not This makes test image 5 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table not have a 10 bit output mode available use of test image 5 on scA750 60 cameras is not normally recommended However one situation where test image 5 is useful on scA750 60 cameras is to check the effect of the luminance lookup table On scA750 60 cameras test image 5 is a 10 bit pattern Since these cameras do Basler scout 239 Standard Features Test Image 6 Moving Diagonal Color
91. value for an image property can only be reached if it is in accord with all only not available on scA750 60 cameras An auto function uses the binned pixel You can use an auto function when binning is enabled monochrome cameras data and controls the image property of the binned image For more information about binning see Section 9 7 on page 201 214 Basler scout Standard Features 9 11 1 1 Modes of Operation The following auto function modes of operation are available All auto functions provide the once mode of operation When the once mode of operation is selected the parameter values are automatically adjusted until the related image property reaches the target value After the automatic parameter value adjustment is complete the auto function will automatically be set to off and the new parameter value will be applied to the following images The parameter value can be changed by using the once mode of operation again by using the continuous mode of operation or by manual adjustment Some auto functions also provide a continuous mode of operation where the parameter value is adjusted repeatedly while images are acquired Depending on the current frame rate the automatic adjustments will usually be carried out for every or every other image The repeated automatic adjustment will proceed until the once mode of operation is used or until the auto function is set to off in
92. white balance of the image However as soon as the Balance White Auto function is set to once operation mode the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 5 These settings will control the white balance of the image For information on the white balance feature see Section 9 3 on page 190 To use the balance white auto function carry out the following steps 1 Select Auto Function AOlI2 2 Set the position and size of Auto Function AOI2 3 Enable the balance white auto function by setting it to once You can carry out steps 1 to 3 from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to use the auto function Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI2 See the Auto Function AOI section above Enabling the balance white auto function and selecting the once mode of operation Select the AOI to use for auto white balancing Currently AOT2 is predefined to gather the pixel data needed for automatic white balancing Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector_AOI2 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Set the mode of oper
93. will The response times for the output lines on your camera will typically fall into the depend on the external resistor and the applied voltage you use Basler scout 63 Physical Interface VO_In_1 12 Pin Receptacle Not Connected VO_In_1 VO_In_2 V O_In_Gnd VO_Out_1 VO_Out_2 Gnd O_In_Gnd Not Connected VO_In_2 V O_Out_VCC VO_Out_3 VO_Out_4 3 3V O In_1_ Ctrl ONONRWN In_2 Ctrl Gnd VO_In_Gnd Out_1_ Ctrl 220 O_Out_VCC Q BC847BS O _Out 1 Out_2_Ctrl 220 0 O_Out_VCC Q BC847BS VO_Out_2 Out_3 Ctrl 220 0 1 0_Out_VCC Q BC847BS 1 0_Out_3 Out_4 Ctrl 220 9 1 0_Out_VCC Q BC847BS Gnd D BAS16 VO_Out_4 Fig 39 I O Line Schematic 64 Basler scout I O Control 6 I O Control This section describes how to configure the camera s two physical input lines and four physical output lines It also provides information about monitoring the state of the input and output lines For more detailed information about the physical and electrical characteristics of the input and output lines see Section 5 4 on page 53 6 1 Configuring Input Lines 6 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a Hardware Trigger Signal You can assign the camera s input lines to receive external hardware trigger ExTrig signals The incoming ExTrig signals can then be used to control image acquisition Section 7 4 5 2 on page 91 Section 7 5 3 4 o
94. will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate For more specific information about the lens thread length see Section 1 5 3 on page 32 CAUTION Basler scout Incorrect Power Can Cause Damage The polarity of the power on the camera s IEEE 1394b socket must be as shown in the pin assignment table Do not reverse the power polarity Reversing the polarity will damage the camera If the voltage to the camera is greater than 36 VDC damage to the camera can result If the voltage is less than 8 VDC the camera may operate erratically 37 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 38 CAUTION Inappropriate Code May Cause Unexpected Camera Behavior The code snippets provided in this manual are included as sample code only Inappropriate code may cause your camera to function differently than expected and may compromise your application To ensure that the snippets will work properly in your application you must adjust them to meet your specific needs and must test them thoroughly prior to use The code snippets in this manual are written in C Other programming languages can also be used to write code for use with Basler pylon When writing code you should use a programming language that is both compatible with pylon and appropriate for your application For more information about the programming languages that can be used with Basler pylon see the documentation included with the pylon package
95. you could use the camera s exposure time parameter settings and the timing formulas to calculate when it is safe to begin each new acquisition However there is a more convenient way to know when it safe to begin each acquisition The camera supplies a trigger ready signal that is specifically designed to let you trigger acquisitions safely and efficiently For more information about using the Trigger Ready signal with scA750 60 fm fc cameras see Section 7 11 4 on page 135 130 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 11 Acquisition Monitoring Tools 7 11 1 Exposure Active Signal The camera s exposure active ExpAc signal goes high when the exposure time for each image acquisition begins and goes low when the exposure time ends as shown in Figure 60 This signal can be used as a flash trigger and is also useful when you are operating a system where either the camera or the object being imaged is movable For example assume that the camera is mounted on an arm mechanism and that the mechanism can move the camera to view different portions of a product assembly Typically you do not want the camera to move during exposure In this case you can monitor the ExpAc signal to know when exposure is taking place and thus know when to avoid moving the camera ee Exposure Exposure Exposure Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2 2 3 5 usm lt 2 3 5 us gt i ExpAc E 10 26 Us pi 10 26 us gt Signal Timing
96. you would select user settable output 3 Set the value of the User Output Value parameter to true high or false low This will set the state of the selected line You can set the Output Selector and the User Output Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to designate output line 3 as user settable and setting the state of the output line Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Out3 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource_UserOutput Camera UserOutputSelector SetValue UserOutputSelector_UserOutput3 Camera UserOutputValue SetValue true bool currentUserOutput3State Camera UserOutputValue GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Setting the State of Multiple User Settable Output Lines The User Output Value All parameter is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 40 the lowest four bits of the parameter value will set the state of the user settable outputs If a bit is 0 it will set the state of the associated output to low If a bit is high it will set the state of the associated port to high 68 Basler scout I O Control Sets user output 4 state Sets user output 3 state Sets user output 2 state Sets user output 1 state 31 30 29
97. 0 For camera 3 the calculation would be 1000 4096 24 4 If you add these three results together you find that 97 7 of the available bandwidth is being used Keep in mind that if the sum was greater than 100 you would need to lower the packet size setting for one or more of the cameras Basler scout 267 Using Multiple Cameras on a Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth 11 2 1 Recommended Packet Size When you change the value of the packet size setting on a camera there is something that you must keep in mind If you lower the packet size setting the camera takes longer to transmit each acquired image And if you lower the packet size enough it will begin to restrict the maximum frame rate that the camera can achieve A read only parameter called the Recommended Packet Size can help you avoid this problem The recommended packet size parameter indicates the lowest value you can use for the packet size setting without restricting the camera s maximum allowed frame rate Assume for example that you checked the packet size parameter value and you found it to be 2400 This would mean that if you set the camera s packet size to 2400 bytes or more the camera s maximum allowed frame rate would not be affected by the packet size setting And if you set the packet size lower than 2400 the camera s maximum allowed frame rate would be affected The farther below 2400 you set the packet size the more restricted the maximum frame rate w
98. 10 bit value associated with it If the sensor reports a pixel value of 1023 the camera will not be able to perform an interpolation In this case the camera simply uses the mapped 10 bit value from location 1022 in the table The advantage of the luminance lookup table feature is that it allows a user to customize the response curve of the camera The graphs on the next page show the effect of two typical lookup tables The first graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the output of the camera increases linearly as the sensor output increases The second graph is for a lookup table 210 Basler scout Standard Features where the values are arranged so that the camera output increases quickly as the sensor output moves from 0 through 512 and increases gradually as the sensor output moves from 513 through 1023 1023 ioBit 768 Mapped Value 512 256 0 0 256 512 768 1023 10 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 74 Lookup Table with Values Mapped in a Linear Fashion 1023 10 Bit oe Mapped Value 512 256 0 0 256 512 768 1023 10 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 75 Lookup Table with Values Mapped for Higher Camera Output at Low Sensor Readings Basler scout 211 Standard Features Changing the Values in the Luminance Lookup Table and Enabling the Table You can change the values in the luminance lookup table LUT and enable the use of the lookup table by doing the following Use the LUT Selector to select a lookup tab
99. 4 5 Deep R ee CCS 2 l 10 Ne E i N 1263 Photosensitive _ 0285 surface of the 29 sensor 3 25 i 86 3 2x M3 4 5 Deep o ag z Co N Top 2 x M3 3 5 Deep Fig 25 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras 90 Head with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter 30 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter is as shown in Figure 26 X 0 4 center lines of the thread 0 25 lt g o ii ge U a A D TOATA f C S dat i O O e 20 1 lo O J A c 1 Ke to the length of the housing center lines of the sensor gt reference plane tolerance to the center of the lens mount optical axis gt front module reference plane toleranc
100. 5 26 27 28 29 30 Auto Function AOI AoC eet Image AOI AAA a 0123 465 67 8 9 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NN Auto Function AOI Image AOI J g 0123 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Auto Function AOI Image AOI a HEHHEHE E Imr O mMmrmrmee 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Auto Function AOI z LLL B
101. AA B BA Frame Start Li LI LI Li Li Li Li Trigger Signal ones woce eee ee eee eee eee ee ee ee ee Time Fig 53 Use Case 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off Basler scout 121 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Off Frame Start Trigger On Use case two is illustrated on page 123 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the acquisition start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera The camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame exposure In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal This type of camera setup is used frequently in industrial applications One example might be a wood products inspection system used to inspect the surface of pieces of plywood on a conveyor belt as they pass by a camera In this situation a sensing device is usually used to determine when
102. ANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 34 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 7 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems The cameras are frequently installed in industrial environments These environments often include devices that generate electromagnetic interference EMI and they are prone to electrostatic discharge ESD Excessive EMI and ESD can cause problems with your camera such as false triggering or can cause the camera to suddenly stop capturing images EMI and ESD can also have a negative impact on the quality of the image data transmitted by the camera To avoid problems with EMI and ESD you should follow these general guidelines Always use high quality shielded cables The use of high quality cables is one of the best defenses against EMI and ESD Try to use camera cables that are the correct length and try to run the camera cables and p
103. API to get the parameter values Resulting Framerate double resultingFps Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about the AOI settings see Section 9 6 on page 198 Basler scout 143 Image Acquisition Control Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate You may find that you would like to acquire frames at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with the camera s current settings In this case you must first use the three formulas described below to determine what factor is restricting the maximum frame rate the most Next you must try to make that factor less restrictive You will often find that the sensor readout time is most restrictive factor Decreasing the height of the acquired frames will decrease the sensor readout time and will make this factor less restrictive If you find that the number of packets needed to transmit an image is restricting the frame rate you may be able to decrease the number of packets needed to transmit a frame The next section in this manual explains more about the effect of changing the packets per frame If you are using normal exposure times and you are using the camera at it s maximum re
104. Abs by the correct Exposure Time Abs parameter name in Section 9 11 3 on page 223 Added the auto function profile feature in Section 9 11 4 on page 225 and adjusted Section 9 11 2 on page 221 and Section 9 11 3 on page 223 accordingly Added the trigger delay feature in Section 9 14 on page 231 Added the acquisition status feature in Section 9 15 on page 233 and added a reference in Section 7 2 3 on page 80 Added the high gain and auto functions factory setups and the standard factory setup formerly the default set in Section 9 19 on page 243 Added descriptions about resetting the frame counter and about relating frame and trigger input counter in Section 10 3 on page 249 Corrected the maximum value for the frame counter in Section 10 3 on page 249 Added the trigger input counter feature in Section 10 5 on page 254 284 Basler scout Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00012512000 14 Apr 2011 Integrated the scA1600 28fm fc Updated European and U S phone numbers and U S contact address Indicated the availability of programming languages other than C for use with pylon in Section 1 9 on page 37 Changed the maximum allowed current for an output circuit to 50 mA in Section 5 7 2 2 on page 60 Modified input line assignment to take account of standard and legacy modes in image acquisition control in Section 6 1 1 on page 65 Added the Acquisition Trigger Wait signal to Sec
105. Abs parameter value sets the delay time base in us The default is 1 us and it can be changed in 1 us increments Note that there is only one timer delay time base and it is used by all four of the available timers You can set the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera TimerDelayTimebaseAbs SetValue 5 Basler scout 71 1 0 Control Setting the Delay with an Absolute Value You can also set the Timer delay by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Timer Delay Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us To set the delay for a timer using an absolute value Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Delay Abs parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector_Timerl Camera TimerDelayAbs SetValue 100 When you use the Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Timer Delay Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by the Timer Delay Abs sett
106. Basler scout USER S MANUAL for Scout f Cameras Used with Basler s Pylon API Document Number AW000125 Version 12 Language 000 English Release Date 14 April 2011 BASLER For customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules For customers in Canada This apparatus complies with the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in Radio Interference Regulations Pour utilisateurs au Canada Cet appareil est conforme aux normes Classe A pour bruits radio lectriques
107. C 12 Pin Your Gnd Receptacle Fig 37 Typical LED Output Signal at 24 VDC for the External Circuit Example By default the camera s exposure active ExpAc signal is assigned to Output Line 1 The exposure active signal indicates when exposure is taking place By default the camera s trigger ready TrigRdy is assigned to Output Line 2 The trigger ready signal goes high to indicate the earliest point at which exposure start for the next frame can be triggered The assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines can be changed by the user Basler scout 61 Physical Interface For more information about output line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 5 2 on page 50 For more information about the exposure active signal see Section 7 11 1 on page 131 For more information about the trigger ready signal see Section 7 11 3 on page 132 For more information about assigning camera output signals to physical output ports see Section 6 2 on page 67 62 Basler scout Physical Interface 5 7 3 Output Line Response Time Response times for the output lines on the camera are as shown below Camera Output Signal Output Line Voltage Time Fig 38 Output Line Response Times Time Delay Rise TDR 1 5 us Rise Time RT 1 3 5 0 us Time Delay Fall TDF 1 20 us Fall Time FT 1 5 us ranges specified above The exact response time for your specific application
108. Gradient The moving diagonal color gradient test image is available on color cameras only and is designed for use when the camera is set for YUV output As shown in Figure 80 test image six consists of diagonal color gradients The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever you signal the camera to capture anew image To display this test pattern on a monitor you must convert the YUV output from the camera to 8 bit RGB Fig 80 Test Image Six 240 Basler scout Standard Features 9 18 Device Information Parameters Each camera includes a set of device information parameters These parameters provide some basic information about the camera The device information parameters include Device Vendor Name read only contains the name of the camera s vendor For scout cameras this string will always indicate Basler as the vendor Device Model Name read only contains the model name of the camera for example scA640 70fm Firmware Version read only contains the version of the firmware in the camera Device ID read only contains the serial number of the camera Device Scan Type read only contains the scan type of the camera for example area scan Sensor Width read only contains the physical width of the sensor in pixels Sensor Height read only contains the physical height of the sensor Max Width read only Indicates the camera s maximum area of interest AOI width setting Max Height r
109. Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler scout 253 Chunk Features 10 4 Time Stamp The Time Stamp feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a time stamp that was generated when image acquisition was triggered The time stamp is a 32 bit value The time stamp is based on the cycle timers for the IEEE 1394b bus The counters start at camera reset or at power off on The table below how the cycle timers are assigned to the 32 bits in the chunk Bits Description 0 6 Seconds counts in seconds Wraps to zero after 127 seconds 7 19 Cycle Count counts the number of 125 us isochronous bus cycles Wraps to zero after counting to 7999 20 31 Cycle Offset counts at 24 576 MHz and wraps to zero after counting to 3071 resulting in a 125 us cycle any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all chunk The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the time stamp feature or features To enable the time stamp chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Time Stamp chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the time stamp chunk is enabled the camera will add a time stamp chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to the image you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser tha
110. Mono 8 0 05 8 4 Pixel Transmission Sequence 00 00 cece tenes Standard Features wits 8 eid eee notion eee eee ees Qed Gay An ete aa te cp anaa a ts EOD Bint A E na a ala a tongue U E a Bab leh Saget oo as 9 2 Black Levelics eecceen dawes wee bhed ade ew eRe awe Gee dded ade ew ewes 9 3 White Balance on Color Models 000 cee eee eee 9 4 7 DiQitalS Mittis soc guaes i Six eaten hi Seats BRAS E koh Wien Ohh Sa ee ON wee Is 9 4 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats 00 000000 eee 9 4 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats 2000 002 eee 9 4 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift 0 0 000000 9 4 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift 0 0 0 eee eee 9 5 Integrated IR Cut Filter on Color Models 0000 0c eee eee 9 6 Areaof Interest AOI 0 0 62 tees 9 6 1 Changing AOI Parameters On the Fly 000 ccc eee 9 7 Binning All Models Except scA750 60 00000 cee ee 9 7 1 Considerations When Using Binning 0 0 00 eee eee eee 9 8 Reverse X rns atenevatagee eogteadid stim abd tee a a alaale ea eis ead nan ene DaS Va Basler scout Table of Contents 9 9 Luminance Lookup Table 0 eee tees 207 9 9 1 Lookup Table All Models Except scA750 60 000 e eae 207 9 9 2 Lookup Table SscA750 60 Only 0 2 00 c eee eee 210 O10 CGaMM as M
111. Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 242 Basler scout Standard Features 9 19 Configuration Sets A configuration set is a group of values that contains all Non volatile of the parameter settings needed to control the camera Flash Volatile There are three basic types of configuration sets the ea TURANI active configuration set the default configuration set User Se ae ee and user configuration sets Wesa Active Configuration Set Default Factory e The active configuration set contains the camera s t current parameter settings and thus determines the a a camera s performance that is what your image _Factory Setup _ currently looks like When you change parameter paigh Gain settings using the pylon API or the pylon Viewer you are Anis Functions making changes to the active configuration set The ee Seca MeL active configuration set is located in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera Fig 81 Configuration Sets is reset or if power is switched off The active configuration set is usually called the active set for short Default Configuration Set When a camera is manufactured numerous tests are performed on the camera and three factory optimized setups are determined The three factory optimized setups are The Standard Factory Setup is optimized for average conditions and will provide good camera performance in many common applications In the standard factory setup the gain
112. a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 109 LOS IMOUUCHON 423i ti ctw eae tan Wak oe Se geha did ee na eS 109 7 6 3 2 Exposure Modes 0 02 c eee eee 111 7 6 3 3 Acquisition Start Trigger Delay 000 000 88 113 7 6 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 114 7 7 Exposure Time Parameters 0 00 0 tet eee eee 116 7 7 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using Raw Settings 117 7 7 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using Absolute Settings 118 78 Use Case Diagrams 2st sea ocean bide Ree ee ene Sea ee ie eee 119 7 9 Overlapping Exposure and Sensor Readout All Models Except scA750 60 128 7 9 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation 0 0 0 eee eee 129 7 10 Exposure Must Not Overlap Sensor Readout scA750 60 Only 130 7 11 Acquisition Monitoring Tools 0 0 eee eee 131 7 11 1 Exposure Active Signal 0 0 0 0 ec eee ee 131 7 11 2 Acquisition Status Indicator 0 0 ee 132 7 11 3 Trigger Ready Signal All Models Except scA750 60 132 Basler scout iii Table of Contents 7 11 4 Trigger Ready Signal scA750 60 Only 2 eee eee 7 11 5 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal Standard Mode Only 7 12 Acquisition Timing Chart 0 0000 eee 7 13 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Fram
113. a et net Sted yesnc hae Dome eens Pe ewled Nenad en 2 Doce ain at ned 213 9 11 Auto FUNCHONS i eean el eee ee aa eee eee RE OE a eed 214 9 11 1 Common Characteristics 0 0 0 0 ee 214 9 11 1 1 Modes of Operation 0 0 ee eee 215 9 11 12 AUTO BUNCION AO ot ti tod e nate cima le ade E 216 9 11 1 3 Using an Auto Function 0 0 cece eee 220 9 11 27 GaN AUlO soit eae oa sa ogg ie od ices ene Oiels Baan dies bate 221 9 113 Exposure AUO esa cet ew Ree bee BES aah Lae Ste SS 223 9 11 4 Auto Function Profile 0 uaaa ae 225 9 11 5 Balance White Auto 0 20 0 tee 226 9 12 Disable Parameter Limits 0 00 00 cece ees 228 9 13 DebDOUNCE serci dei peed Rea eal bea ee ee ee ee ee ec eee ees 229 9 14 Trigger Delay a neeite es Po Pe Pa eee Eo ee ee ee 231 9 15 Acquisition Statu S s segete pvew See Nae eek bebe de baw ee oe as 233 9 16 Event Reporting an 2 ean t ad Sind SW bale ee on Ee a Re eS 235 9 17 Testilmages vs ie e ied einer eed bees ed ade erties E veers 237 9 18 Device Information Parameters 0 0c ee tees 241 9 19 Configuration Sets tte 243 9 19 1 Saving User Seltsis icer 0 0 eens 244 9 19 2 Selecting a Factory Setup as the Default Set 0040 245 9 19 3 Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set into the Active Set 246 9 19 4 Selecting the Startup Set 0 2 0 ee 247 10 Gh k Features cc tice aes Haw ewe eer wn eterna 249 10 1 What are Ch
114. a hardware frame start trigger and when the trigger will become effective The trigger delay will not operate if the Trigger Mode parameter for frame start is set to off or if you are using a software frame start trigger For more information about the trigger delay feature and how to use it see Section 9 14 on page 231 7 5 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Start Trig gering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware frame start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the camera for single frame acquisition mode with the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger set to off We will use the timed exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering In this example we will use a trigger delay Set the acquisition mode to single frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_SingleFrame Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_Off Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for t
115. a piece of plywood on the conveyor is properly positioned in front of the camera When the plywood is in the correct position the sensing device transmits an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on line 1 it serves as a frame start trigger signal and initiates a frame acquisition The frame acquired by the camera is forwarded to an image processing system which will inspect the image and determine if there are any defects in the plywood s surface 122 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On The acquisition start trigger is off The camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply a frame start trigger signal to input line 1 to start each frame exposure Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge atrigger signal generated by the camera internally a trigger signal applied by the user Camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame tra
116. a we ee ele date Meee aa a ase ee ia 60 5 7 2 1 Voltage Requirements 0 00 eee 60 5 7 2 2 Line Schematic 0 00 cece eee 60 5 7 3 Output Line Response Time 0 cece ee 63 6 VO COnttoliccccinaaaw tide tet ee Reta A ew ees WEA ees 65 6 1 Configuring Input Lines 00 26 e eee 65 6 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a Hardware Trigger Signal 65 6 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive a User Input Signal 66 6 2 Configuring Output Lines a aaau aaaea 67 6 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical Output Line 67 6 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lines 68 6 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert 0 0 cee ee 69 6 2 4 Working with Timers 0 0 0 0 cee tees 70 6 2 4 1 Setting the Trigger Source fora Timer 5 70 6 2 4 2 Setting a Timer Delay Time 0 0 0 eee ee 71 6 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time 0020000 0 eee 73 6 3 Checking the State of the I O Lines 00002 ee 75 6 3 1 Checking the State of a Single Output Line 00 0000 75 6 3 2 Checking the State of All Lines 0 0 ee 75 7 Image Acquisition Control 0 00 eee 77 7 1 Image Acquisition Control Modes Legacy and Standard 0 77 7 2 Means for Controlling Image Acquisition in Standard Mode 79 7 3 Acquisit
117. a when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 24 And so on As you can see the table does not include a user defined 12 bit value for every pixel value that the sensor can report So what does the camera do when the sensor reports a pixel value that is between two values that have a defined 12 bit output In this case the camera performs a straight line interpolation to determine the value that it should transmit For example assume that the sensor reports a pixel value of 12 In this case the camera would perform a straight line interpolation between the values at location 8 and location 16 in the table The result of the interpolation would be reported out of the camera as the 12 bit output Another thing to keep in mind about the table is that location 4088 is the last location that will have a defined 12 bit value associated with it Locations 4089 through 4095 are not used If the sensor reports a value above 4088 the camera will not be able to perform an interpolation In cases where Basler scout 207 Standard Features the sensor reports a value above 4088 the camera simply transmits the 12 bit value from location 4088 in the table The advantage of the luminance lookup table feature is that it allows a user to customize the response curve of the camera The graphs below show the effect of two typical lookup tables The first graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the output of the camera incr
118. a will automatically begin generating acquisition start trigger signals when it receives an Acquisition Start command The camera will continue to generate acquisition start trigger signals until it receives an Acquisition Stop command The rate at which the acquisition start trigger signals are generated will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter If the parameter is not enabled the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the maximum rate allowed with the current camera settings If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value less than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the rate specified by the parameter setting If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the maximum allowed frame rate For information about setting the Acquistion Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 7 6 1 3 on page 106 in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 4 on page 85 Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is 104 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Exposure Time Control with the Acquisition Start Trigg
119. ale will only include every 16th gray value for example 16 32 48 64 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 4 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 256 9 4 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses a 12 bit ADC to digitize the output from the imaging sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 8 bit effective depth by default the camera drops the 4 least significant bits from the ADC and transmits the 8 most significant bits bit 11 through 4 Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 3 from the ADC The result of shifting once is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is viewing a uniform white target and that under these conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 10 If you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 20 Basler scout ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit
120. all of the readings are below 32 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 16 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings 9 4 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift You can enable or disable the digital shift feature by setting the value of the Digital Shift parameter When the parameter is set to zero digital shift will be disabled When the parameter is set to 1 2 3 or 4 digital shift will be set to shift by 1 shift by 2 shift by 3 or shift by 4 respectively You can set the Digital Shift parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Disable digital shift Camera DigitalShift SetValue 0 Basler scout 195 Standard Features Enable digital shift by 2 Camera DigitalShift SetValue 2 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 196 Basler scout Standard Features 9 5 Integrated IR Cut Filter on Color Models Color models of the camera that have a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an IR cut filter as standard equipment The filter is mounted inside of the lens adapter Cameras without an IR cut filter a
121. alue from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data Make chunk mode active and enable CRC chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_PayloadCRC1l 6 Basler scout 261 Chunk Features For Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true Check the CRC checksum of an grabbed image IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize if ChunkParser HasCRC amp amp ChunkParser CheckCRC cerr lt lt Image corrupted lt lt endl detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For 262 more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout Using Multiple Cameras on a Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth 11 Using Multiple Cameras ona Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth This section includes information about using multiple cameras on a single IEEE 1394 bus 11 1 Using Multiple C
122. amera is internally generating frame start trigger signals Basler scout 137 Image Acquisition Control Acq Trigger Wait Signal A ExASTrig Signal RESE Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Time RS Camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger status Fig 63 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal The acquisition trigger wait signal will only be available when hardware acquisition start triggering is enabled 138 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Selecting the Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The acquisition trigger wait signal can be selected to act as the source signal for camera output line 1 line 2 line 3 or line 4 Selecting a source signal for an output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 line 2 line 3 or line 4 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the acquisition trigger wait signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the paramet
123. ameras Where All Devices are 1394b Most of the information included in this manual assumes that you have a single camera attached to your IEEE 1394b bus But is it also quite common to attach more than one camera to a single bus One of the main advantages of the IEEE 1394 bus architecture is that it is designed to handle multiple devices such as cameras connected to a single bus And the connected devices can share the available bandwidth on the bus One way you can manage two cameras on a single bus is to operate the cameras so that only on camera is transmitting an image at any given time In this situation the camera transmitting images can use 100 of the bus bandwidth In many situations however you would like to have two or more cameras transmitting images at the same time In this case the cameras that are transmitting images simultaneously must share the available bus bandwidth To understand how bandwidth is shared on an IEEE 1394 bus we need to look at a few bus architecture basics The IEEE 1394b bus operates on a 125 microsecond cycle During each cycle the bus can carry a single packet from one device with a packet size up to 8192 bytes As an alternative the bus can carry several packets from different devices where the sum of the packet sizes is 8192 bytes or less These two situations are illustrated in Figure 84 In situation 1 shown in the figure a single camera camera A is attached to the bus and we want that camera
124. an safely do so without over running or under running the buffer This buffering technique is also an important element in achieving the highest possible frame rate with the best image quality The exposure start delay is the amount of time between the point where the trigger signal transitions to the point where exposure actually begins The frame readout time is the amount of time it takes to read out the data for a captured image from the CCD sensor into the image buffer The time to transmission end is the amount of time between the point where the camera begins reading out the captured image data from the sensor to the point where it finishes transmitting the data for the captured image from the buffer to the host PC The exposure start delay varies from camera model to camera model The table below shows the exposure start delay for each camera model Camera Model Exposure Start Delay Camera Model Exposure Start Delay scA640 70fm fc 33 43 us scA1300 32fm fc 33 16 us scA640 74fm fc 31 84 us scA1390 17fm fc 64 88 us scA640 120fm fc 19 67 us scA1400 17fm fc 64 09 us scA750 60fm fc 179 us scA1400 30fm fc 36 99 us scA780 54fm fc 34 27 us scA1600 14fm fc 65 25 us scA1000 20fm fc 70 18 us scA1600 28fm fc 30 31 us scA1000 30fm fc 48 80 us Table 14 Exposure Start Delays 140 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Note that if the debouncer feature is used the debouncer setting for the input
125. ap when Frame Period lt Exposure Time Readout Time Exposure will not overlap when Frame Period gt Exposure Time Readout Time You can calculate the readout time for a captured image by using the formula on page 140 7 9 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation If you will be operating the camera with overlapped exposure there are two important guidelines to keep in mind You must not begin the exposure time for a new image acquisition while the exposure time of the previous acquisition is in progress You must not end the exposure time of the current image acquisition until readout of the previously acquired image is complete The camera will ignore any trigger signals that violate these guidelines When you are operating a camera with overlapped exposure and using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition you could use the camera s exposure time parameter settings and timing formulas to calculate when it is safe to begin each new acquisition However there is a much more convenient way to know when it safe to begin each acquisition The camera supplies a trigger ready signal that is specifically designed to let you trigger overlapped exposure safely and efficiently For more information about using the Trigger Ready signal with all camera models except the scA750 60 fm fc see Section 7 11 3 on page 132 Basler scout 129 Image Acquisition Control For more detailed guidelines about using an external trig
126. ar to the minimum and then Is the exposure time set near to the use the continuous grab button to start image capture nr 7 ma Can you achieve the full frame rate now Yes No Yes If the exposure time is very high it can be a limiting factor on the maximum frame rate that can be achieved You will need to run with a lower exposure time If this makes your image too dark try increasing your lighting decreasing the f stop on your lens increasing the gain setting or increasing the black level setting Exit this chart Are you using an external trigger Increase the frequency of the trigger signal signal to trigger image capture Does this give you an increase in the frame rate No Yes When you are operating the camera with an external trigger signal the frequency of the signal determines the frame rate If the frequency is too low you will not achieve the maximum allowed frame rate Exit this chart 274 Basler scout Troubleshooting and Support Leave one camera attached to the bus and Is there more than one camera detach all of the others Yes attached to the IEEE 1394 bus Can the attached camera now run at a higher frame rate No No Yes The IEEE bus does not have sufficient bandwidth to transmit the data from multiple cameras running at high frame rates Try attaching each camera to a separate IEEE 1394 adapter card in the PC Exit this chart Contact Basler technical support The
127. are by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the input line Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Linel Set the parameter value to 100 microseconds Camera LineDebouncerTimeAbs SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 230 Basler scout Standard Features 9 14 Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware trigger and it becoming effective The trigger delay can be specified in the range from 0 to 10000000 Us equivalent to 10 s When the delay is set to 0 us no delay will be applied Note the different applicability of the trigger delay depending on the image acquisition control mode Standard mode The trigger delay can be applied to the acquisition start trigger parameter is set to off the camera will generate all acquisition start trigger The trigger delay will not operate if the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode signals internally or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger The trigger delay can be applied to the frame start trigger se
128. as occurred A Frame ID This number indicates the frame count at the time that the event occurred A Stream Channel Identifier Currently this identifier is always 0 A Timestamp This is a timestamp indicating when the event occurred 2 The event is placed in an internal queue in the camera 3 As soon as bus transmission time is available an event message will be sent to the PC If only one event is in the queue the message will contain the single event If more than one event is in the queue the message will contain multiple events 4 Event Reporting involves some further software related steps and settings to be made For more information see the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit The timestamp is a 32 bit value The structure of this timestamp is similar to the timestamp described in Section 10 4 on page 254 The Event Queue As mentioned in the example above the camera has an event queue The intention of the queue is to handle short term delays in the camera s ability to access the bus and send event messages When event reporting is working smoothly a single event will be placed in the queue and this event will be sent to the PC in an event message before the next event is placed in queue If there is an occasional short term delay in event message transmission the queue can buffer several events and can send them within a single event message as soon as transmission time is availa
129. asler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to software and the Acquisition Frame Count to 5 Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Basler scout 87 Image Acquisition Control Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Software j Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to line 1 the Trigger Activation to rising edge and the Acquisition Frame Count to 5 Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger
130. ates that the state of the associated line was low at the time of triggering If a bit is 1 it indicates that the state of the associated line is was high at the time of triggering Indicates output line 4 state Indicates output line 3 state Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 fo Fig 82 Line Status All Parameter Bits or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the line status all feature chunk features To enable the line status all chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Line Status All chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the line status all chunk is enabled the camera will add a line status all chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the line status all information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Line Status All parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API
131. ation for balance white auto function Camera BalanceWhiteAuto SetValue BalanceWhiteAuto_Once 226 Basler scout Standard Features For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 9 11 1 on page 214 For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them see Section 9 11 1 2 on page 216 Basler scout 227 Standard Features 9 12 Disable Parameter Limits For each camera parameter the allowed range of parameter values normally is limited The factory limits are designed to ensure optimum camera operation and in particular good image quality For special camera uses however it may be helpful to set parameter values outside of the factory limits The disable parameter limits feature lets you disable the factory parameter limits for certain parameters When the factory parameter limits are disabled the parameter values can be set within extended limits Typically the range of the extended limits is dictated by the physical restrictions of the camera s electronic devices such as the absolute limits of the camera s variable gain control The values for the extended limits can be seen using the Basler pylon Viewer or from within your application via the pylon API Currently the parameter limits can only
132. ature numbers external image acquisition triggers sequentially as they are received When the feature is enabled a chunk is added to each image containing the related value of the trigger input counter The trigger input counter is a 32 bit value On the first counting cycle the counter starts at 1 and increments by 1 for each received trigger The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before see below After having reached the maximum value the counter will continue counting starting at 0 Be aware that if the camera is operating in continuous frame mode free run the trigger input counter will not be available feature or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the trigger input counter disables all chunk features To enable the trigger input counter chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Trigger Input Counter chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the trigger input counter chunk is enabled the camera will add a trigger input counter chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the trigger input counter information by doing the following Read the valu
133. be set in increments of 2 and they must be set to an even number For example the X Offset parameter can be set to 0 2 4 6 8 etc physical columns and lines in the sensor But if binning is enabled these parameters are set in terms of virtual columns and lines For more information see Section 9 6 on page 198 Normally the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter settings refer to the Basler scout 199 Standard Features You can set the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to get the maximum allowed settings and the increments for the Width and Height parameters They also illustrate setting the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values int64_t widthMax Camera Width GetMax int64_t widhInc Camera Width GetInc Camera Width SetValue 200 Camera OffsetX SetValue 100 int 64_t heightMax Camera Height GetMax int64_t heightInc Camera Height GetInc j Camera Height SetValue 200 Camera OffsetY SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 9 6 1 Changing AOI Parameters On the Fly
134. bit bit bit 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S S B Not Shifted B lt gt ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S D Shifted Once 193 Standard Features If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 128 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 2 from the ADC ADC The result of shifting twice is that the output of the en bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit camera is effectively multiplied by 4 10 79 8 6 SrA B22 1 58 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 64 L S Shifted Twice Shift by 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will include bit 8 through bit 1 from the ADC The resu
135. ble Basler scout 235 Standard Features However if you are operating the camera at high frame rates with a small AOI the camera may be able to generate and queue events faster than they can be transmitted and acknowledged In this case 1 The queue will fill and events will be dropped 2 An event overrun will occur Assuming that you have event overrun reporting enabled the camera will generate an event overrun event and place it in the queue 4 As soon as transmission time is available an event message containing the event overrun event will be transmitted to the PC The event overrun event is simply a warning that events are being dropped The notification contains no specific information about how many or which events have been dropped Setting Your System for Event Reporting Event reporting must be enabled in the camera and some additional software related settings must be made This is described in the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit Event reporting must be specifically set up for each type of event using the parameter name of the event and of the supplementary information The following table lists the relevant parameter names Event Event Parameter Name Supplementary Information Parameter Name Acquisition Start AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventData AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventStreamChannellndex Overtrigger AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp
136. camera is set for Mono 16 the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the unsigned short little endian type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below Note that for 16 bit data you might expect a value range from 0x0000 to OxFFFF However with the camera set for Mono16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are effective Therefore the highest data value you will see is OxOFFF indicating a signal level of 4095 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 When a camera that is set for Mono 16 has only 12 bits effective the leader of transmitted frames will indicate Mono 12 as the pixel format 158 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats 8 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 12 Packed pixel data format it outputs 12 bits of brightness data per pixel Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono 12 Packed output The following standards are used in the table Pg the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer
137. cations 0 cee eee 2 1 3 Spectral Response for Mono Cameras 00000 cee eee 12 1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras 0 ce tees 18 1 5 Mechanical Specifications 0 0 eens 24 15 1 Standard HOUSING ran vray Gee be ene ed eee eed ee ed Se 24 1 5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points 24 1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy 0 0 27 15 2 90 Head Housing si essed ed eos Sle peek oe Bean dae ea ee 29 1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points 29 1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy 0 0 0 e eee eee 31 1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras 0 00 e eee 32 1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results 0 0 eee eee eee 33 1 6 Software Licensing Information 0 0 cee 34 1 7 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems 0 0 e ete 35 1 8 Environmental Requirements 0 0 0 0 e eee 36 1 8 1 Temperature and Humidity 0 0 eee 36 13822 Ventilation meriristi ha BEG eed Nesey BR RARE ee ied 36 1 9 Pr6CaullOnSs 44 4 noe ale a Bag ad ea Mh Raa a a hb big wi eE acetone A a aeia 37 2 Software and Hardware Installation 0 0 cece eee eee 41 3 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 20 000 e ee eee eee eee 43 Sat ThE PylOn VOWS sy c die nse eee DOES See aoe dle Ea pana ed BOOS a a a aa u 43 3 2 The pylOmMAP lee xctectitca saan eens ee lY aie tetera gee oa
138. ce signal for the acquisition start 7 4 2 Acquisition Frame Count Standard Mode When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is setto on you must set the value of the camera s Acquisition Frame Count parameter The value of the Acquisition Frame Count can range from 1 to 255 With acquisition start triggering on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When in this acquisition status the camera cannot react to frame start trigger signals If an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the camera has received a number of frame start trigger signals equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting it will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to exit the camera from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status 7 4 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters Standard Mode You can set the Trigger Mode and Trigger Source parameters for the acquisition start trigger and also set the Acquisition Frame Count parameter value from within your application software by using the B
139. cessed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 12 effective bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 12 effective bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 12 effective bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The BG in the name Bayer BG 16 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even lines in the images pixel one will be blue pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue pixel four will be green etc For odd lines in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green pixel four will be red etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 8 3 1 on page 162 The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG 16 output Note that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Bg the first byte of data for a line Bm the last byte of data for a line Even Lines Odd Lines Byte Data Byte Data
140. ch time the externally generated acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig signal goes high Retrieve the captured frames Camera AcquisitionStop Execute For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 115 Image Acquisition Control 7 7 Exposure Time Parameters Many of the camera s image acquisition modes require you to specify an exposure time There are two ways to set exposure time by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value The two methods are described below You can use whichever method you prefer to set the exposure time The exposure time must not be set below a minimum specified value The minimum exposure time varies by camera model as shown in Table 13 The maximum exposure time that can be set also varies by camera model as shown in Table 13 Camera Model Minimum Allowed Exposure Time Maximum Possible Exposure Time scA640 70fm fc 24 us 10000000 us scA640 74fm fc 24 us 10000000 us scA640 120fm fc 16 us 10000000 us scA750 60fm fc 124 us 126976 us scA780 54fm fc 26 us 10000000 us scA1000 20fm fc 52 us 10000000 us scA1000 30fm fc 32 us 10000000 us scA1300 32fm fc 22 us 10000000 us scA1390 17fm fc 34 us
141. charts are not drawn to scale Times stated are typical Fig 60 Exposure Active Signal and the fall of the signal in relation to the start and the end of exposure See When you use the exposure active signal be aware that there is a delay in the rise Figure 60 for details By default the ExpAc signal is assigned to physical output line 1 on the camera However the assignment of the ExpAc signal to a physical output line can be changed Selecting the Exposure Active Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The exposure active output signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the exposure active output signal Basler scout 131 Image Acquisition Control You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource_ExposureActive You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 6 2 1 on page 67 For
142. cket Packet Camera A Camera B Camera C Camera A Camera B Camera C Fig 84 Packet Transmission During Bus Cycles A parameter called the Packet Size is used to set the size of the packet that the camera will transmit on each cycle of the bus For an IEEE 1394b camera attached to an IEEE 1394b bus the minimum value for this setting is 1 byte and the maximum is 8192 bytes If you set the packet size to 8192 the camera will use 100 of the available bus bandwidth when it is transmitting images If you set the bytes per packet to a lower value the camera will use less of the bandwidth For example if you set the value to 5120 62 5 of 8192 then the camera will send 5120 byte packets when it is transmitting image data and will use 62 5 of the available bus bandwidth You can set the value of the Packet Size parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Set packet siz Camera PacketSize SetValue 4096 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 264 Basler scout Using Multiple Cameras on a Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth 11 2 Using Multiple Cameras Where 1394a and 1394b Devices are Mixed
143. complishes the setting change by automatically changing the Timer Duration Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by the Timer Duration Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time That is you must set the Timer Duration Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Timer Duration Raw and the current Timer Duration Base parameters For example if the time base was currently set to 50 us you could use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration to 50 us 100 us 150 us etc If you read the current value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter the value will indicate the product of the Timer Duration Raw parameter and the Timer Duration Time Base In other words the Timer Duration Abs parameter will indicate the current duration time setting You should also be aware that if you change the duration time using the raw settings the Timer Duration Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new duration time 74 Basler scout I O Control 6 3 Checking the State of the I O Lines 6 3 1 Checking the State of a Single Output Line You can determine the current state of an individual output line To check the state of a line Use the Line Selector parameter to select an output line Read the value of the Line Status parameter to determine the current state of the selected line A value of tr
144. cout 75 1 0 Control the state of the associated line is currently low If a bit is 1 it indicates that the state of the associated line is current high Indicates output line 4 state Indicates output line 3 state Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 110 Fig 42 Line Status All Parameter Bits 76 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 Image Acquisition Control This section provides detailed information about controlling image acquisition You will find details about choosing between image acquisition control modes triggering image acquisition setting the exposure time for each acquired image and about how the camera s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate can vary depending on the current camera settings 7 1 Image Acquisition Control Modes Legacy and Standard Two different image acquisition control modes are available the legacy mode and the standard mode Previous Basler scout cameras with firmware version 3 2 and below only operate according to the legacy mode The legacy mode differs from the standard mode in only two respects the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode Recommendatio
145. d the camera actually develops some sort of information about each image that it acquires In these cases the information is added to each image as a trailing data chunk when the image is transferred to the host PC Examples of this type of camera feature are the Frame Counter feature and the Time Stamp feature When the Frame Counter feature is enabled for example after an image is captured the camera checks a counter that tracks the number of images acquired and develops a frame counter stamp for the image And if the Time Stamp feature is enabled the camera creates a time stamp for the image The frame counter stamp and the time stamp would be added as chunks of trailing data to each image as the image is transferred from the camera The features that add chunks to the acquired images are referred to as chunk features Before you can use any of the features that add chunks to the image you must make the chunk mode active Making the chunk mode active is described in the next section Basler scout 249 Chunk Features 10 2 Making the Chunk Mode Active Before you can use any of the camera s chunk features the chunk mode must be made active To make the chunk mode active Set the Chunk Mode Active parameter to true You can set the Chunk Mode Active parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera Chun
146. dane henan ta 164 Bayer RGO i ipua 166 mono 12 packed eeeeeeeeeeee tees 159 MONO T Oieee aa 157 MONO S Aasen arke pennie eat 155 177 YUV 422 YUYV packed 4 175 YUV 422 packed sssr 172 pixel size ooo e eect eeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 6 8 10 pixel transmission sequence 179 PIG WO Cable tennin raed eb cats 55 polarity POWE oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeee 56 power CONSUMPTION n se 56 PIOCAUlIONS saneren Mle oeeeeenees 37 protection class sse 24 29 PYLON AP dresirani 43 pylon Viewer ssessssssssssrriisrrrrsrrrererrsen 43 R recommended packet size parameter 268 reduced resolution secsec 203 289 Index resulting frame rate abs parameter RMA Reese Sea ha tee 143 147 148 151 return material authorization 269 reverse X explained sierpien ideais 204 RMA number ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 269 S S400 Speed timeri readens iait 265 S800 Speed si ae aes 265 saving parameter sets 05 243 244 sensor architecture ou eee eee ccccceeeeeeeeee ees 46 48 optical size ee 2 4 6 8 10 pixel size esseen 2 4 6 8 10 position ACCULACY ou eects 27 31 S ZE hacia dle Seeks Sess 1 2 4 6 8 10 pE aiioe ieiuniis 2 4 6 8 10 sensor height parameter cece 241 sensor width parameter essees 241 serial MUMDES 2 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeees 39 sets of parameters Saving ee 244 single frame acqui
147. direction of view of standard scout cameras The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The dimensions in millimeters for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter are as shown in Figure 25 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the bottom as shown in the drawings In addition there are four mounting holes in the front module 4x M3 4 5 mm deep recommend using the front module reference plane see the figure in the Sensor For optimum accuracy in the positioning of the camera s optical axis we Positioning Accuracy section as mounting surface Basler scout 29 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 32 1 2 x M3 4 5 Deep 375 2 x M3 4 8 Deep 15 6 32 1 o 3 25 p u 51 15 31 a O ery 8 ere al 8 Bottom o VF co e i Wea J mo A 2 x M3 4 Deep X t29 Z 97 12 85 E 91 65 2 x M3 4 5 Deep BASLERT 2 x M3
148. dout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Time Fig 57 Non overlapped Exposure While operating in a non overlapped fashion is perfectly normal and is appropriate for many situations it is not the most efficient way to operate the camera in terms of acquisition frame rate On this camera however it is allowable to begin exposing a new image while a previously acquired image is being read out This situation is illustrated in Figure 58 and is known as operating the camera with overlapped exposure As you can see running the camera with readout and exposure overlapped can allow higher acquisition frame rates because the camera is performing two processes at once 128 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Image Acquisition N Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 1 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 3 Exposure Readout Time Fig 58 Overlapped Exposure Determining whether your camera is operating with overlapped or non overlapped exposures is not a matter of issuing a command or switching a setting on or off Rather the way that you operate the camera will determine whether the exposures are overlapped or not overlapped If we define the frame period as the time from the start of exposure for one image acquisition to the start of exposure for the next image acquisition then Exposure will overl
149. dy output signal you can use to ensure that these conditions are met when you are using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition The trigger ready signal relates to different trigger signals depending on the image acquisition control mode In standard mode the trigger ready signal relates to the frame start tigger signal In legacy mode the trigger ready signal relates to the acquisition start tigger signal When you are acquiring images the camera automatically calculates the earliest moment that it is safe to trigger each new acquisition The trigger ready signal will go high when it is safe to trigger an acquisition will go low when the acquisition has started and will go high again when it is safe to trigger the next acquisition see Figure 61 The camera calculates the rise of the trigger ready signal based on the current exposure time parameter setting the current size of the area of interest and the time it will take to readout the captured pixel values from the sensor The trigger ready signal is especially useful if you want to run the camera at the maximum acquisition frame capture rate for the current conditions If you monitor the trigger ready signal and you begin acquisition of each new image immediately after the signal goes high you will be sure that the camera is operating at the maximum acquisition frame rate for the current conditions Signal goes high Signal goes low Signal goes high Signal goes low a
150. e int64_t frameCounter Camera ChunkFramecounter GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Comparing Counter Chunk Data When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image be aware that the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at 0 Therefore the trigger input count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another counting cycle at 0 Accordingly the difference between matching counts will always be one regardless of the number of counting cycles Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one the camera was overtriggered and not all external triggers resulted in frame acquisitions Frame Counter Reset Whenever the camera is powered off the frame counter will reset to 0 During operation you can reset the frame counter via software or via I O input line 1 or line 2 You can also disable the abili
151. e a single frame start trigger signal whenever it receives an Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame the camera will automatically begin generating frame start trigger signals when it receives an Acquisition Start command The camera will continue to generate frame start trigger signals until it receives an Acquisition Stop command The rate at which the frame start trigger signals are generated will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter If the parameter is not enabled the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum rate allowed with the current camera settings If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value less than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the rate specified by the parameter setting If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum allowed frame rate For information about setting the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 7 5 1 3 on page 95 waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start triggers when it is ina acquisition status see Section 7 2 on page 79 and Section 7 4 on page 85
152. e Rate All Models Except scA750 60 7 13 1 Effect of the Packet Size Setting on the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate 7 14 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate scA750 60 Only 7 14 1 Effect of the Packet Size Setting on the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate Pixel Data Formats 3 2 c2 0cdt nbareiees peers sri tobe xietaa vases 8 1 Setting the Pixel Data Format 200 000 ee 8 2 Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras 00 00 e eee eee 8 2 1 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 0 05 8 2 2 Mono 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 8 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format 0000 cece eee ee 8 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 8 2 5 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format 000 cece eee eee 8 3 Pixel Data Output Formats for Color Cameras 00000 cee eee 8 3 1 The Bayer Color Filter 0 0 eee ees 8 3 1 1 Color Filter Alignment 0 0 0 0 eee 8 3 2 Bayer BG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 8 3 3 Bayer RG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 8 3 4 Bayer BG 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 8 3 5 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format 00 cece eee 8 3 6 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 8 3 7 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format 000 0c eee eee 8 3 8 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM
153. e below but can also be For more information about auto fuctions see Section 9 11 1 on page 214 For more information about the Balance White Auto function see Section 9 11 5 on page 226 Setting the White Balance With the white balancing scheme used on these cameras the red intensity green intensity and blue intensity can be individually adjusted For each color a Balance Ratio parameter is used to set the intensity of the color If the Balance Ratio parameter for a color is set to a value of 1 the intensity of the color will be unaffected by the white balance mechanism If the ratio is set to a value lower than 1 the intensity of the color will be reduced If the ratio is set to a value greater than 1 the intensity of the color will be increased The increase or decrease in intensity is proportional For example if the balance ratio for a color is set to 1 2 the intensity of that color will be increased by 20 The balance ratio value can range from 0 00 to 3 98 But you should be aware that if you set the balance ratio for a color to a value lower than 1 this will not only decrease the intensity of that color relative to the other two colors but will also decrease the maximum intensity that the color can achieve For this reason we don t normally recommend setting a balance ratio less than 1 unless you want to correct for the strong predominance of one color To set the Balance Ratio parameter for a color Set
154. e bit 8 ADC through bit 0 from the ADC along with 3 SE RT ee ee zeros as LSBs Se ae ee ae The result of shifting 3 times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied lM i S S by 8 Ie Shifted Three Times Fal When the camera is set to shift by 3 the 3 least significant bits output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 8th gray value for example 8 16 24 32 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 512 192 Basler scout Shift By 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 through bit 0 from the ADC along with 4 Standard Features ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 0 zeros as LSBs 11 10 The result of shifting 4 times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 16 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the 4 least significant bits output from the Iu eS S B l lt 4 Shifted Four Times camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value sc
155. e counter chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Frame Counter chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the frame counter chunk is enabled the camera will add a frame counter chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the frame counter information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Frame Counter parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the frame counter chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Frame Counter chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_Framecounter Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve date from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Basler scout 251 Chunk Features Result GetPayloadSiz
156. e following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector_All Camera GainRaw SetValue 400 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 If you know the current decimal setting for the gain raw you can use the formulas below to calculate the dB of gain that will result from that setting Formulas for All Models Listed on the Previous Page except scA640 120 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 For gain raw settings from 110 to 511 658 Gain Raw Setting _ Gaings 20 x 10940 658 Gain Raw Setting 8 For gain raw settings from 512 to 1023 Gain jg 0 0354 x Gain Raw Setting G Where E 658 Min Gain Raw Setting Ga 20 0gig 658 Min Gain Raw Setting Example Assume that you are working with a monochrome scA1400 17 camera that has a gain raw setting of 500 Calculating the gain is a two step process Step 1 Go 20 x logy SELLE 658 192 Basler scout 183 Standard Features G 5 22 dB Step 2 658 500 Gaingp 20x lod 49 5 22 dB Gaingp 12 1 dB Calculation for the scA640 120 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 For the entire range of raw set
157. e from 0 to 255 on all camera models except the scA750 60 fm fc On scA750 60 fm fc cameras the parameter value can range from 0 to 64 On scA1300 32 fm fc and scA1400 30 fm fc cameras the parameter value can range from 0 to 1023 To set the Black Level Raw parameter value Set the Black Level Selector to Black Level All Set the Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Black Level Selector and the Black Level Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera BlackLevelSelector SetValue BlackLevelSelector_All Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue 32 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 189 Standard Features 9 3 White Balance on Color Models White balance capability has been implemented on color cameras White balancing can be used to adjust the color balance of the images transmitted from the cameras automatically adjusted The Balance White Auto function is the automatic counterpart of the white balance feature and adjusts the white balance automatically White balance can not only be manually set se
158. e of the Chunk Trigger Input Counter parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the trigger input counter chunk run the parser and retrieve the trigger input counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Trigger Input Counter chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_Triggerinputcounter j Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result 256 Basler scout Chunk Features ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64_t triggerinputCounter Camera ChunkTriggerinputcounter GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Comparing Counter Chunk Data When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image be aware that the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at 0 Therefore the trigger inpu
159. e to the reference planes oe 0 02 This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the Surface ot tne photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die sensor D 7 Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees ER Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y Hn N scA640 70fm fc 0 47 0 63 scA1000 30fm fc 0 46 0 63 N p scA640 74fm fc 0 35 0 47 scA1390 17fm fc 0 31 0 42 E 2 1 scA640 120fm fc 0 62 0 83 scA1400 17fm fc 0 25 0 34 iA scA750 60fm fc 0 51 0 80 scA1400 30fm fc 0 25 0 34 H scA780 54fm fc 0 35 0 47 scA1600 14fm fc 0 34 0 52 OWP scA1000 20fm fc 0 46 0 63 Mes This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the 17 5 lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface Fig 26 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras 90 Head with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter in mm unless otherwise noted Basler scout 31 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras The C mount lens adapter on color models of the camera is normally equipped with an internal IR cut filter As shown below the length of the threads on any lens you use with a color camera must be less than 8 0 mm If a lens with a longer thread length is used the IR cu
160. ead only Indicates the camera s maximum area of interest AOI height setting You can read the values for all of the device information parameters or set the value of the Device ID parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to read the parameters or write the Device ID Read the Vendor Name parameter Pylon String_t vendorName Camera DeviceVendorName GetValue Read the Model Name parameter Pylon String_t modelName Camera DeviceModelName GetValue Read the Firmware Version parameter Pylon String_t firmwareVersion Camera DeviceFirmwareVersion GetValue Read the Device ID parameter Pylon String_t deviceID Camera DeviceID GetValue Read the Sensor Width parameter int64_t sensorWidth Camera SensorWidth GetValue Read the Sensor Height parameter int64_t sensorHeight Camera SensorHeight GetValue Read the Max Width parameter int64_t maxWidth Camera WidthMax GetValue Read the Max Height parameter int64_t maxHeight Camera HeightMax GetValue Basler scout 241 Standard Features For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily read the parameters and to read or write the Device ID For more information about the pylon
161. eases linearly as the sensor output increases The second graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the camera output increases quickly as the sensor output moves from 0 through 2048 and increases gradually as the sensor output moves from 2049 through 4096 4095 72 12 Bit X Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 72 Lookup Table with Values Mapped in a Linear Fashion 4095 i 72 12 Bit 30 Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 73 Lookup Table with Values Mapped for Higher Camera Output at Low Sensor Readings 208 Basler scout Standard Features Using the Luminance Lookup Table to Get 8 Bit Output As mentioned above when the camera is set for a pixel format where it outputs 12 effective bits the lookup table is used to perform a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion But the lookup table can also be used in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion To use the table in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion you enter 12 bit values into the table and enable the table as you normally would But instead of setting the camera for a pixel format that results in a camera output with 12 bits effective you set the camera for a pixel format that results in 8 bit output such as Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 or YUV 4 2 2 Packed In this situation the camera will first use the values in the table to do a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion It will then drop the 4 least significant bits of
162. easing the brightness setting Has the problem been corrected Exit this Contact Basler technical chart support The contact numbers appear on the title page of this manual Take the following actions After you complete each action capture several images to see if the problem has been corrected Nake sure that you are using a DC light source Using an Do the i noisy AC light source can make images appear noisy due to the oe mages appeal Holy inherent intensity variations normally seen with AC light sources Note Some very specialized AC light sources are designed to output a constant light level even though they operate on AC If you must use an AC light source check with the manufacturer to make sure that it outputs an absolutely constant light intensity Make sure that the camera has proper ventilation If the camera gets extremely hot it may produce noisy images Check the exposure time setting in the Acquisition Controls group on the pylon Viewer If the camera is set for a very long exposure time the images can become noisy Check the gain setting Using a very low or a very high gain setting can cause noisy images Examine the objects you are imaging Objects with Contact Basler technical characteristics such as changing surface texture or support The contact reflectance will produce images that appear noisy numbers appear on the title page of this manual Has the problem been corrected Exit t
163. easing the gain setting or decreasing the black level setting N image in After you make each change use the single grab button to 5 the viewer capture an image Do you see a captured test image in the viewer now If the image quality is poor go to the Poor Image Quality Yes troubleshooting The camera was badly misadjusted Exit this chart chart If the image quality is acceptable troubleshooting is complete Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the title page of this manual Basler scout 273 Troubleshooting and Support 12 4 3 I Can Not Get the Full Frame Rate Use this troubleshooting chart if you are attempting to run the camera at its maximum stated frame rate and you are not able to do so Start the pylon Viewer software enter the Transport Layer group and check the setting for the Packet Size parameter Is the packet size set the to the Set the packet size to the maximum and then use the maximum continuous grab button to start image capture Can you achieve the full frame rate now Yes No Yes When the packet size setting is set low it increases the number of packets that it takes to transmit an image from the camera to the PC This means that it takes longer to transmit each image and decreases the maximum possible frame rate Exit this chart Go to the Acquisition Controls parameter group and check the exposure le aw setting Set the exposure time ne
164. eceptacle Pin Assignments Physical Interface The 12 pin receptacle is used to access the two physical input lines and four physical output lines on the camera The pin assignments for the receptacle are shown in Table 8 Pin Designation Not connected Not connected I O Input 1 I O Input 2 I O Input Gnd I O Output 1 I O Output 2 Not connected oO J INIIAI HRI w Pp Not connected I O Output VCC 11 1 O Output 3 12 I O Output 4 Table 8 Pin Assignments for the 12 pin Receptacle e Oo Pin numbering for the 12 pin receptacle is as shown in Section 5 2 3 on page 51 5 2 3 Pin Numbering Q Fig 33 Pin Numbering for the IEEE 1394b Socket and the 12 pin Receptacle Basler scout 51 Physical Interface 5 3 Connector Types 5 3 1 IEEE 1394b Connector The 1394b socket on the camera is a standard 9 pin IEEE 1394b bilingual socket The recommended mating connector is any standard 9 pin IEEE 1394b plug 5 3 2 12 pin Connector The 12 pin connector on the camera is a Hirose micro receptacle part number HR10A 10R 12P or the equivalent The recommended mating connector is the Hirose micro plug part number HR10A 10P 12S or the equivalent 52 Basler scout Physical Interface 5 4 Cabling Requirements 5 4 1 IEEE 1394b Cable The maximum length of the IEEE 1394b cable used between the camera and the adapter in your PC or between
165. ed and transmitted across the IEEE 1394b bus to your host PC A parameter called Packet Size determines the number of bytes of data that will be included in each packet transferred across the bus The minimum value for the Packet Size parameter is 1 and the maximum value is 8192 Normally the value of the Packet Size parameter is set to the maximum and at maximum the Packet Size parameter has no noticeable effect on the operation of the camera If you lower the value of the Packet Size parameter the amount of image data included in each packet transmitted across the bus will be lower This means that it will take more packets to transmit each frame and since the cycle time of the IEEE 1394b bus is fixed it also means that it will take more time to transmit each frame If you lower the Packet Size parameter enough the slower data transfer rate can begin to affect the maximum allowed frame capture rate of your camera If you look at the formulas the previous section you will notice that one of the factors that can limit the maximum allowed frame rate is the number of packets needed to transmit a frame The number of packets per frame is directly related to the Packet Size parameter setting You can see the effect of changing the Packet Size parameter by looking at the read only parameter called Resulting Frame Rate Abs The Resulting Frame Rate Abs parameter indicates the maximum frame rate with the current camera settings If you gradually decrease
166. el Table 17 shows the filter alignment for each available camera model Color Camera Model Filter Alignment scA640 70 BG scA640 74 BG scA640 120 BG scA750 60 RG scA780 54 BG scA1000 20 BG scA1000 30 BG scA1300 32 BG scA1390 17 BG scA1400 17 BG scA1400 30 BG scA1600 14 BG scA1600 28 BG Table 17 Bayer Filter to Sensor Alignment Bayer BG alignment means that pixel one and pixel two of the first line in each image transmitted will be blue and green respectively And for the second line transmitted pixel one and pixel two will be green and red respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image Bayer RG alignment means that pixel one and pixel two of the first line in each image transmitted will be red and green respectively And for the second line transmitted pixel one and pixel two will be green and blue respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image Because the size and position of the area of interest on color cameras must be adjusted in increments of 2 the color filter alignment will remain the same regardless of the camera s area of interest AOI settings The Pixel Color Filter parameter indicates the current alignment of the camera s Bayer filter to the pixels i
167. elected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Software Set the acquisition frame count Basler scout 89 Image Acquisition Control Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a trigger software command to apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to Acquisition Start executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 7 4 5 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 7 4 5 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to line 1 an externally generated electrical signal injected into physical input line 1 on the camera will act as the acquisition start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is genera
168. ent of the trigger signal to a physical output line can be changed Selecting the Trigger Ready Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The trigger ready signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the trigger ready output signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource_TriggerReady You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 6 2 on page 67 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 5 7 2 on page 60 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 7 1 on page 77 136 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 11 5 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal Standard Mode Only control is set to standard mode For more information about image acquisition control and setting the mode see Sect
169. er Mode Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116 7 6 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on you must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera each time you want to begin a frame acquisition The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal that will act as the acquisition start trigger signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger on the host PC Line 1 or 2 When the source signal is set e g to line 1 you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 or Line 2 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger
170. er color cameras are by For optimum use of the available bandwidth the scA1600 28fc cameras are by default set to the YUV 4 2 2 pixel format Details of the monochrome formats are described in Section 8 2 on page 155 and details of the color formats are described in Section 8 3 on page 162 You can set the Pixel Format parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera Pixel Camera Pixel Camera Pixel Camera Pixel Camera Pixel Camera Pixel Camera Pixel Format SetVal Format SetVal Format SetVal Format SetVal Format SetVal Format SetVal ue ue ue Format SetValue ue ue ue PixelFormat_Monog PixelFormat_Monol2Packed PixelFormat_Monol PixelFormat_YUV422Packed i i PixelFormat_YUV422_YUYV_Packed PixelFormat_BayerBG8 PixelFormat_BayerBG16 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 154 Basler scout 8 2 8 2 1 Pixel Data Formats Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format it output
171. er value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource_AcquisitionTriggerWait You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler scout 139 Image Acquisition Control 7 12 Acquisition Timing Chart Figure 64 shows a timing chart for image acquisition and transmission The chart assumes that exposure is triggered with an ExTrig signal with rising edge activation and that the camera is set for programmable exposure mode The ExTrig signal will be an externally triggered frame start trigger signal when using image acquisition control in standard mode The ExTrig signal will be an externally triggered acquisition start trigger signal when using image acquisition control in legacy mode As Figure 64 shows there is a slight delay between the rise of the ExTrig signal and the start of exposure After the exposure time for an image capture is complete the camera begins reading out the captured image data from the CCD sensor into a buffer in the camera When the camera has determined that a sufficient amount of image data has accumulated in the buffer it will begin transmitting the data from the camera to the host PC This buffering technique avoids the need to exactly synchronize the clock used for sensor readout with the clock used for data transmission over the IEEE 1394b bus The camera will begin transmitting data when it has determined that it c
172. er window i Yes Go to the Image Format Controls parameters group enable one of the test images and use the single grab button to capture an image Do you see a test image in the viewer Yes No I just Go to the Acquisition Controls parameters group and seea check to see if the trigger mode is set to on If the trigger uniform mode is set to on set it to off now wey mage Use the single grab button to capture an image 2 viewer Do you see a test image in the viewer now Yes Disable test images and then use the single grab button to capture a live image Triggering was enabled but you were not supplying an external trigger signal When triggering is enabled you must Do you seg a capturen mage inthe supply a trigger signal to start image capture Exit this chart Yes s First make sure that the lens cap has been removed Next try No just increasing the brightness of your lighting decreasing the f stop see a setting on your lens increasing the exposure time setting uniform 3 increasing the gain setting or increasing the black level setting No image in After you make each change use the single grab button to the viewer capture an image Do you see a captured test image in the viewer now Yes The camera was badly misadjusted Exit this chart Ng Dust Try decreasing the brightness of you lighting increasing the niform f stop setting on your lens decreasing the exposure time setting MHIE decr
173. erisssrrrsrerrerrrnnee 111 exposure Start delay cecce 140 exposure time controlling with an external trigger SIQNAl aaeeea reiii aei 98 109 maximum possible sse 116 minimum allowed cceeeeeee 116 SOWING eiin iin 116 117 exposure time abs parameter nece E nearer E 93 95 106 118 exposure time base abs parameter 117 exposure time raw parameter 117 288 F factory Setup sesseccececerreen 243 245 auto functions factory setup 243 high gain factory setup seee 243 standard factory Setup ee 243 TRANG ved ook dl ree aed UR eee de 79 frame counter CHUNK ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 ESOL descend Aes acts 252 frame rate controlling with an external trigger si al orodni aaie era as ties 98 110 maximum allowed ceeeeees 148 frame readout time a e 141 frame Start trigger eeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 80 d tail Sea ihanne eiaeaen E ananin iae 92 frame start trigger delay standard Mode ccececeeeeeeeeeeees 101 frame start trigger mode parameter 93 104 frame transmission end time 141 fee T M 22 cats setateetccustauuedeglshdeauastee ss teeeyets 120 front module o0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 29 functional description eseese 45 G Qalace ieiciadlahcltstietecsessteascaghatadens 181 SOWING eee iinet ices 182 186 gain Autoni tector e 221 gamma correction eere 213 H hardware trigger acquisition Start 0
174. et You can select the default configuration set i e whichever was selected as the default configuration set either the Standard Factory Setup the High Gain Factory Setup or the Auto Functions Factory Setup or one of the user configuration sets stored in the camera s non volatile memory to be the startup set The configuration set that you designate as the startup set will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset The User Set Default Selector is used to select the startup set Set the User Set Default Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or Default You can set the User Set Default Selector from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector Camera UserSetDefaultSelector SetValue UserSetDefaultSelector_Default Basler scout 247 Standard Features 248 Basler scout Chunk Features 10 Chunk Features This section provides detailed information about the chunk features available on each camera 10 1 What are Chunk Features In most cases enabling a camera feature will simply change the behavior of the camera The Test Image feature is a good example of this type of camera feature When the Test Image feature is enabled the camera outputs a test image rather than a captured image This type of feature is referred to as a standard feature When certain camera features are enable
175. etValue i Camera LUTValue SetValue 4095 i Enable the lookup table Camera LUTEnable SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 209 Standard Features 9 9 2 Lookup Table scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 fm fc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 9 9 1 on page 207 On these cameras pixel data is acquired at 10 bit depth Before the pixel values are transmitted out of the camera the two least significant bits are dropped and the pixel data is transmitted at 8 bit depth Normally the 10 bit pixel data reported by the sensor s ADCs is directly used to generate the 8 bit output transmitted by the camera The luminance lookup table feature lets you use a custom 10 bit to 10 bit lookup table to map the 10 bit output reported by the ADCs to 10 bit values of your choice The mapped 10 bit values will then be truncated and transmitted by the camera as 8 bit values The lookup table is essentially just a list of 1024 values however not every value in the table is actually used If we number the values in the table from 0 through 1023 the table works like this The n
176. f the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 2048 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 0 ADC from the ADC along with 2 zeros as LSBs bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting twice is that the output of 1 10 9 9 7T 0 5 4 9 2 1 0 the camera is effectively multiplied by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the 2 least 5 5 significant bits output from the camera for each B Shifted Twice B pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 4th value for example 4 8 16 20 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 1024 Shift By 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will includ
177. face finish Read the manual Read the manual carefully before using the camera Basler scout 39 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 40 Basler scout Software and Hardware Installation 2 Software and Hardware Installation The information you will need to install and operate the camera is included in the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com The guide includes information about both hardware and software and describes how to begin capturing images Basler scout 41 Software and Hardware Installation 42 Basler scout Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 3 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters This chapter explains the options available for changing the camera s parameters The available options let you change parameters either by using stand alone tools that access the camera via a GUI or by accessing the camera from within your software application 3 1 The pylon Viewer The Basler pylon Viewer is a standalone application that lets you view and change most of the camera s parameter settings via a GUI based interface The viewer also lets you acquire images display them and save them Using the pylon Viewer software is a very convenient way to get your camera up and running quickly when you are doing your initial camera evaluation or doing acamera design in for a new project The py
178. ffect on the images transmitted by the camera For test images 1 2 3 and 6 the cameras digital features such as the luminance lookup table will also have no effect on the transmitted images But for test images 4 and 5 the cameras digital features will affect the images transmitted by the camera This makes test images 4 and 5 a good way to check the effect of using a digital feature such as the luminance lookup table Enabling a Test Image The Test Image Selector is used to set the camera to output a test image You can set the value of the Test Image Selector to one of the test images or to test image off You can set the Test Image Selector from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the selector set for no test image Camera TestImageSelector SetValue TestImageSelector_Off set for the first test image Camera TestImageSelector SetValue TestImageSelector_Testimagel For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 237 Standard Features Test Image 1 Fixed Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit fixed diagonal gray gradient test image is best suited for use when the camera is set fo
179. ger signal with the trigger width exposure mode and overlapped exposure refer to the application notes called Using a Specific External Trigger Signal with Overlapped Exposure AW000565xx000 The application notes are available in the downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com 7 10 Exposure Must Not Overlap Sensor Readout scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 fm fc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 7 9 on page 128 The image acquisition process on the camera includes two distinct parts The first part is the exposure of the pixels in the imaging sensor Once exposure is complete the second part of the process readout of the pixel values from the sensor takes place On these cameras exposure for a new acquisition must not begin until readout of the previously acquired image is complete This situation is illustrated in Figure 57 Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Time Fig 59 Non overlapped Readout and Exposure A result of this characteristic is that the exposure time setting on the camera will have a direct effect on the camera s maximum allowed frame rate At longer exposure times the maximum allowed frame rate will be lower When you are operating a camera and using a hardware trigger to trigger image acquisition
180. gger delay double TriggerDelay_us 1000 0 1000us 1ms 0 0018 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay_us For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 7 1 on page 77 232 Basler scout Standard Features 9 15 Acquisition Status When controlling image acquisition with a software trigger you can use the acquisition status feature to detemine when the camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition Using this feature you can avoid triggering the camera at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For other means of checking the acquisition status see also the Acquisition Monitoring Signals section you cannot use the status of the Acquisition Start command to determine when the It is not possible to monitor the status of the Acquisition Start command Therefore camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition Note the different applicability of the acquisition status feature depending on the image acquisition control mode Standard mode The acquisition status can be determined for the frame start trigger Legacy mode
181. gger width exposure mode and the camera is operating with overlapped exposures there is something you must keep in mind If the action of the ExASTrig signal would end the current exposure while readout of the previously acquired image is still taking place the camera will automatically continue the exposure until readout of the previous image is complete This situation is illustrated in Figure 52 for rising edge operation On the first cycle of the ExASTrig signal shown in the figure the signal rises and falls while readout is taking place Normally you would expect exposure to take place only when the ExASTrig signal is high But since the signal falls while the previous frame is still reading out the camera automatically extends exposure until the readout is complete On the second cycle of the ExASTrig signal shown in the figure the signal rises during previous frame readout but falls after the readout is complete This is anormal situation and exposure would be determined by the high time of the ExASTrig signal as you would expect 112 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control TrigRdy Signal Exposure o ae ExASTrig Signal JTO FeeL Frame Readout o ramena Femen Fig 52 Trigger Width Exposure Mode with Overlapped Exposure You can set the exposure time parameter value and select an exposure mode from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the
182. ggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the camera for single frame acquisition mode We will use the timed exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering In this example we will use a trigger delay Set the acquisition mode to single frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_SingleFrame Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation_RisingEdge Set the trigger delay for one millisecond 1000us 1ms 0 001s double TriggerDelay_us 1000 0 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay_us Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_Timed Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute Frame acquisition will start when the externally generated acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig signal goes high
183. gnal is received by the camera Figure 44 illustrates frame acquisition with a software acquisition start trigger signal When the camera receives a software trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new acquisition start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new acquisition start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the camera s Exposure Mode parameter must be set to timed The exposure time for each acquired frame will be determined by the camera s exposure time parameters Basler scout 107 Image Acquisition Control Software Acquisition Start Software Acquisition Start Trigger Signal Received Trigger Signal Received Frame Acquisition rs wo pl Exposure Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameter Fig 48 Frame Acquisition with a Software Acquisition Start Trigger When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the frame rate will be determined by how often you apply a software trigger signal to the camera and you should not attempt to trigger frame acquisition at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings There is a detailed explanation about the maximu
184. gs from the current active set to a reserved area in the camera s non volatile memory A configuration set saved in the non volatile memory is not lost when the camera is reset or switched off There are three reserved areas in the camera s non volatile memory available for saving configuration sets A configuration set saved in a reserved area is commonly referred to as a user configuration set or user set for short The three available user sets are called User Set 1 User Set 2 and User Set 3 lost when the camera is reset or switched off If used these settings must be set The settings for the luminance lookup table are not saved in the user sets and are again after each camera reset or restart Startup Set You can select the default configuration set or one of the user configuration sets stored in the camera s non volatile memory to be the startup set The configuration set that you have selected as the startup set will automatically be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset Instructions for selecting the startup set appear below For more information about auto functions see Section 9 11 on page 214 9 19 1 Saving User Sets Saving the current active set into a user set in the camera s non volatile memory is a three step process Make changes to the camera s settings until the camera is operating in a manner that you would like to save Set the Use
185. h either the acquisition start trigger or the frame start trigger At that point the changes you make to the Trigger Mode Trigger Source etc will be applied to the selected trigger only Exposure Time Control As mentioned earlier when a frame start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will begin to acquire a frame A critical aspect of frame acquisition is how long the pixels in the camera s sensor will be exposed to light during the frame acquisition If the camera is set for software frame start triggering the exposure time parameters will determine the exposure time for each frame If the camera is set for hardware frame start triggering there are two modes of operation timed and trigger width With the timed mode the exposure time parameters will determine the exposure time for each frame With the trigger width mode the way that you manipulate the rise and fall of the hardware signal will determine the exposure time The trigger width mode is especially useful if you want to change the exposure time from frame to frame 82 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 3 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode Legacy and Standard Mode Executing an Acquisition Start commmand prepares the camera to acquire frames You must execute an Acquisition Start command before you can begin acquiring frames Executing an Acquisition Stop command terminates the camera s ability to acqui
186. he camera is in this acquisition status it cannot react to frame start trigger signals When an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals The camera will continue to react to frame start trigger signals until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to an integer parameter setting called the Acquisition Frame Count At that point the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will remain in that status until a new acquisition start trigger signal is applied As an example assume that the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on the Acquisition Frame Count parameter is set to three and the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has received three frame start trigger signals it will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to make it exit waiting for acquisition start trigger Frame Start
187. he X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed 659 The sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed the height of the camera s sensor For example on the scA640 70 the sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed 494 The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1 and Height parameters for an Auto Function AOI in increments of 2 to make the Auto Function AOI match the Bayer filter pattern of the sensor For example you should set the X Offset parameter to 0 2 4 6 8 etc On color cameras we strongly recommend setting the X Offset Y Offset Width Function AOI refer to the physical columns and lines in the sensor But if binning is enabled monochrome cameras only not available on scA750 60 cameras these parameters are set in terms of virtual columns and lines i e the settings for an Auto Function AOI will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would Normally the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter settings for an Auto For more information about the concept of a virtual sensor see Section 9 7 1 on page 202 You can select an Auto Function AOI and set the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values for the Auto Function AOI from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following
188. he dB of gain that will be achieved at various Gain Raw settings Gain Setting dB Gain 0 0 5 5 3 10 8 5 15 10 9 20 12 7 22 13 4 Table 20 dB of Gain at Various Settings Basler scout 187 Standard Features 9 2 Black Level Adjusting the camera s black level will result in an offset to the pixel values output by the camera Increasing the black level setting will result in a positive offset in the digital values output for the pixels Decreasing the black level setting will result in a negative offset in the digital values output for the pixels Effect on All Camera Models Except the scA640 120 scA750 60 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 Bayer RG 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed an increase of 16 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels And a decrease of 16 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed Bayer BG 16 Bayer RG 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed an increase of 1 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels A decrease of 1 in the setting will resu
189. he frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger 108 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Software Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_Timed Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a Trigger Software command to apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Retrieve acquired frame here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to AcquisitionStart executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 7 6 3 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 7 6 3 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter
190. he selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation_RisingEdge Set the trigger delay for one millisecond 1000us 1Ims 0 001s double TriggerDelay_us 1000 0 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay_us Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_Timed Set th xposure time Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Basler scout 101 Image Acquisition Control Camera AcquisitionStart Execute Frame acquisition will start when the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and execute the commands related to hardware frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode and the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger set to off We will use the trigger width exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the m
191. here it is assembled into data packets The packets are passed to a 1394b physical layer controller which transmits them isochronously to an interface board in the host PC The physical and link layer controllers also handle transmission and receipt of asynchronous control data such as changes to the camera s parameters The image buffer between the sensor and the link layer controller allows data to be read out of the sensor at a rate that is independent of the data transmission rate between the camera and the host computer This ensures that the data transmission rate has no influence on image quality Basler scout 47 Functional Description l CMOS Sensor l Pixel Array 1 4 Analog Processing 1 4 l ADCs Digital Processing Digitized Pixel Data Fig 30 CMOS Sensor Architecture 24 MB Image Buffer e g ExpActive TrigRdy Link Physical IEEE Layer Layer 1394b Controller lsochronous Controller Isochronous Bus and and Asynchronous Asynchronous Data Data Control AOI Gain Black Level Control Micro Controller Control Data Fig 31 Camera Block Diagram 48 Basler scout Physical Interface 5 Physical Interface This chapter provides detailed information such as pinouts and voltage requirements for the physical interface on the camera This information will be especially useful during your init
192. his Contact Basler technical chart support The contact numbers appear on the title page of this manual Basler scout 277 Troubleshooting and Support 12 5 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support To help you as quickly and efficiently as possible when you have a problem with a Basler camera it is important that you collect several pieces of information before you contact Basler technical support Copy the form that appears on the next two pages fill it out and fax the pages to your local dealer or to your nearest Basler support center Or you can send an e mail listing the requested pieces of information and with the requested files attached Basler technical support contact information is shown in the title section of this manual 278 The camera s product ID The camera s serial number 1394 adapter that you use with the camera Describe the problem in as much detail as possible If you need more space use an extra sheet of paper If known what s the cause of the problem When did the problem occur After start After a certain action e g a change of parameters While running Basler scout Troubleshooting and Support 7 How often did does the problem f Once Every time occur Regularly when Occasionally when 8 How severe is the problem f Camera can still be used Camera can be used after ta
193. hs Each cable is terminated with a 12 pin Hirose plug HR10A 10P 12S on the end that connects to the camera The other end is unterminated Contact your Basler sales representative to order the cables For information about the applicable voltage levels see Section 5 7 1 1 on page 57 5 5 IEEE 1394b Device Information The camera uses an IEEE1394b 2002 compliant physical layer device that can transmit at speeds up to 800 Mbit s S800 The device is backward compatible with IEEE 1394a 2000 devices Detailed spec sheets for IEEE 1394b 2002 compliant physical layer devices of the type used in the camera are available at the Texas Instruments website www ti com Basler scout 55 Physical Interface 5 6 Camera Power Camera power must be supplied to the camera via the IEEE 1394b cable Power consumption is as shown in the specification tables in Section 1 of this manual If your camera is connected to an IEEE 1394b adapter in a desktop computer consult the instructions for the adapter and make sure that the adapter is properly configured to supply power to the camera If your camera is connected to a powered hub consult the instructions for the hub and make sure that it is properly configured to supply power to the camera Many laptop computers have a connector for an IEEE 1394 device In most cases laptops do not supply power to the connected IEEE 1394 device In this situation you must use a powered hub between the laptop and
194. ial design in process 5 1 General Description of the Connections The camera is interfaced to external circuity via connectors located on the back of the housing an IEEE 1394b socket used to provide power and a bus connection to the camera a 12 pin receptacle used to provide access to the camera s I O ports There is also an LED indicator on the back The drawing below shows the location of the two connectors and the LED EEE Socket Ol Ezz O LED 12 pin Receptacle Fig 32 Camera Connectors and LED Basler scout 49 Physical Interface 5 2 Connector Pin Assignments and 5 2 1 Numbering IEEE 1394b Socket Pin Assignments The IEEE 1394b socket is used to supply power to the camera and to interface video data and control signals The pin assignments for the socket are as shown in Table 7 Note that these are the standard pin assignments for IEEE 1394b sockets Pin Signal 1 TPB twisted pair B minus 2 TPB twisted pair B plus 3 TPA twisted pair A minus 4 TPA twisted pair A plus 5 TPAR twisted pair A ground 6 VG power ground 7 Not connected 8 VP 8 to 36 VDC power 9 TPBR twisted pair B ground Table 7 Pin Assignments for the IEEE 1394b Socket Pin numbering for the IEEE 1394b socket is as shown in Section 5 2 3 on page 51 50 Basler scout 5 2 2 12 pin R
195. igger signal In legacy mode the trigger ready signal relates to the acquisition start trigger signal 132 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control When you are acquiring images the camera automatically calculates the earliest moment that it is safe to trigger each new acquisition The trigger ready signal will go high when it is safe to trigger an acquisition will go low when the acquisition has started and will go high again when it is safe to trigger the next acquisition see Figure 61 The camera calculates the rise of the trigger ready signal based on the current exposure time parameter setting the current size of the area of interest and the time it will take to readout the captured pixel values from the sensor The trigger ready signal is especially useful if you want to run the camera at the maximum acquisition frame capture rate for the current conditions If you monitor the trigger ready signal and you trigger acquisition of each new image immediately after the signal goes high you will be sure that the camera is operating at the maximum acquisition frame rate for the current conditions Signal goes high Signal goes low Signal goes high Signal goes low at earliest safe when exposure at earliest safe when exposure moment to trigger for acquisition moment to trigger for acquisition acquisition N 1 N 1 begins acquisition N 2 N 2 begins TrigRdy Signal Image Acquisition N Exposure Readout Image Acquisition
196. iggerSelector_FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Software Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_Timed Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a Trigger Software command to apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Retrieve acquired frame here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to FrameStart executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 97 Image Acquisition Control 7 5 3 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 7 5 3 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 on the camera will act as the frame
197. ime Timer Delay Raw Parameter Value x Timer Delay Time Base By default the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us Typically the delay time is adjusted by setting the Timer Delay Raw parameter value The Timer Delay Raw parameter value can range from 0 to 4095 So if the value is set to 100 for example the timer delay will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us To set the delay for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector_Timerl Camera TimerDelayRaw SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Changing the Delay Time Base By default the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us minimum value and the timer delay is normally adjusted by setting the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter However if you require a delay time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter alone the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the delay time base The Timer Delay Time Base
198. ime is determined by the product of these two elements Exposure Time Exposure Time Raw Parameter Value x Exposure Time Base By default the Exposure Time Base is fixed at 20 us on all camera models except the scA750 60 On scA750 60 cameras the default Exposure Time Base is 31 us Typically the exposure time is adjusted by setting only the Exposure Time Raw parameter The Exposure Time Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 4095 So if the parameter value was set to 100 on an scA640 70 camera for example the exposure time will be 100 x 20 us or 2000 us Settings for Obtaining the Maximum Possible Exposure Time On all camera models except the scA750 60 you can obtain the maximum possible exposure time 10000000 us by setting the Exposure Time Raw parameter value to 1 and the Exposure Time Base Abs value to 10000000 us On scA750 60 cameras you can obtain the maximum possible exposure time 126976 us by e g setting the exposure time raw parameter value to 2048 and the Exposure Time Base Abs value to 62 us Changing the Exposure Time Base Normally the exposure time is adjusted by setting the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter as explained above However if you require an exposure time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter alone the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the exposure time base The Exposure Time Base Abs parameter value sets
199. imer Use the Timer Selector to select timer 1 or timer 2 Set the value of the Timer Trigger Source parameter to exposure active This will set the selected timer to use the start of exposure to begin the timer You can set the Trigger Selector and the Timer Trigger Source parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector_Timerl _ExposureStart Camera TimerTriggerSource SetValue TimerTriggerSourc For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 70 Basler scout I O Control 6 2 4 2 Setting a Timer Delay Time There are two ways to set the delay time for a timer by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value You can use whichever method you prefer to set the delay time Setting the Delay with Raw Values When the delay time for a timer is set using raw values the delay time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter and the second element is the Timer Delay Time Base The delay time is the product of these two elements Delay T
200. ing This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time That is you must set the Timer Delay Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Timer Delay Raw and the current Timer Delay Base parameters For example if the time base was currently set to 50 us you could use the Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay to 50 us 100 us 150 us etc Note that if you set the Timer Delay Abs parameter to a value that you could not achieve by using the Timer Delay Raw and current Timer Delay Time Base parameters the camera will automatically change the setting for the Timer Delay Abs parameter to the nearest achieveable value You should also be aware that if you change the delay time using the raw settings the Timer Delay Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new delay time 72 Basler scout I O Control 6 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time There are two ways to set the duration time for a timer by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value You can use whichever method you prefer to set the duration time Setting the Duration with Raw Values When the duration time for a timer is set using raw values the duration time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter and the second element is the Timer Duration Time Base The duration
201. ing down to 1636 For camera 2 the calculation would be 0 60 x 8192 4915 2 bytes per packet the packet size must be set to a multiple of 4 so we would round the setting down to 4912 So in this case you would set the packet size for camera 1 to 1636 bytes and for camera 2 to 4912 bytes You may be asking why we multiply the percentage for camera 1 by 4096 and the percentage for camera 2 by 8192 The reason is During the part of the bus cycle when the packet for camera 1 is transmitted the bus will operate 266 Basler scout Using Multiple Cameras on a Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth at S400 speed At S400 the maximum number of bytes that can be transmitted in a bus cycle is 4096 During the part of the bus cycle when the packet for camera 2 is transmitted the bus will operate at S800 speed At S800 the maximum number of bytes that can be transmitted in a bus cycle is 8192 Example 2 Assume that you have three cameras on the bus and that you want these camera to capture and transmit images simultaneously Camera one is operating at S800 speed and is set for a packet size of 4200 bytes Camera two is operating at S800 speed and is set for a packet size of 1800 bytes Camera 3 is operating at S400 speed and is set for a packet size of 1000 bytes How much of the available bandwidth would each camera use For camera 1 the calculation would be 4200 8192 51 3 For camera 2 the calculation would be 1800 8192 22
202. iod in seconds For example if you are operating a camera with an ExASTrig signal period of 20 ms 0 020 s 1 ets Se f gozo 7 90 PS So in this case the frame rate is 50 fps acquire frames at too high a rate some of the acquisition trigger signals that you apply will be received by the camera when itis notin a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status The camera will ignore any acquisition start trigger signals that it receives when it is not waiting for acquisition start trigger This situation is commonly referred to as over triggering the camera If you are triggering frame acquisition with an ExASTrig signal and you attempt to To avoid over triggering you should not attempt to acquire frames at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExASTrig signal see Section 7 6 3 4 on page 114 For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 5 7 1 on page 57 For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 7 13 on page 143 and Section 7 14 on page 148 110 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 6 3 2 Exposure Modes If you are triggering the start of frame acquisition with an externally generated acquisition start trigger ExASTrig signal two ex
203. ion 1 5 2 2 on page 31 front module reference planes and deleted excess receptacle in Figure 22 in Section 1 5 1 1 on page 24 Added note on internal dust seal in Section 1 9 on page 37 Added warning not to remove the serial number in Section Section 1 9 on page 37 Updated times in Section 5 7 3 on page 63 Corrected receptable pin assignments in Fig 36 in Section 5 7 3 on page 63 Removed note on scA750 60 output in Sections 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 3 6 8 3 7 8 3 8 Corrected sequence of colors for Bayer BG 12 Packed format in Section 8 3 5 on page 170 Minor corrections throughout the manual AW00012505000 21 Dec 2007 Added guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems in Section 2 1 1 on page 34 Corrected the voltage ranges relating to logic 0 and logic 1in Section 5 7 1 on page 57 Added references to Application Notes AW000565xx000 in Section 7 3 1 on page 83 and Section 7 9 1 on page 129 Added reference to binning in Section 9 6 on page 198 Added the binning feature in Section 9 7 on page 158 Added the Gamma feature in Section 9 10 on page 213 Added the Disable Parameter Limits feature in Section 9 12 on page 228 Added the Debouncer feature in Section 9 13 on page 229 Minor corrections throughout the manual AW00012506000 15 Feb 2008 Included the Software Licensing Information section on page 34 Moved the guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems to Section 1 7 on page 35 Included the warning related to code snip
204. ion 7 1 on page 77 The acquisition trigger wait signal is only available when the image acquisition As you are acquiring frames the camera automatically monitors the acquisition start trigger status and supplies a signal that indicates the current status The Acquisition Trigger Wait signal will go high whenever the camera enters a waiting for acquisition start trigger status The signal will go low when an external acquisition start trigger ExASTrig signal is applied to the camera and the camera exits the waiting for acquisition start trigger status The signal will go high again when the camera again enters a waiting for acquisition trigger status and it is safe to apply the next acquisition start trigger signal If you base your use of the ExASTrig signal on the state of the acquisition trigger wait signal you can avoid acquisition start overtriggering i e applying an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera when it is not in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status If you do apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera when it is not ready to receive the signal it will be ignored and an acquisition start overtrigger event will be reported Figure 63 illustrates the Acquisition Trigger Wait signal with the Acquisition Frame Count parameter set to 3 and with exposure and readout overlapped The figure assumes that the trigger mode for the frame start trigger is set to off so the c
205. ion Start Trigger Mode Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera 7 4 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and cannot react to frame start trigger signals You must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to exit the camera from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals and will continue to do so until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting The camera will then return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status In order to acquire more frames you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to exit it from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on you must select a source signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal The available
206. ion Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode Legacy and Standard Mode 000 cece tee eee 83 7 4 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Standard Mode 0 00 e eee eee 85 7 4 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode 00 86 7 4 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off 2 200005 86 7 4 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On naana naana 86 7 4 2 Acquisition Frame Count Standard Mode 0 2000000e 87 7 4 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters Standard Mode 00000 ce eee eee 87 7 4 4 Using A Software Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 89 7 4 4 1 Introduction sia nada e ma ea eee 89 7 4 4 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 89 ji Basler scout Table of Contents 7 4 5 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 90 7 4 5 1 Introduction 000 eee 90 7 4 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 91 7 5 The Frame Start Trigger in Standard Mode 00 0c e eee eee 92 7 5 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode 0020005 93 7 5 1 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Off 0000202 eee 93 7 5 1 2 Frame Start Trigger Mode On 0 eee eee 94 7
207. ion about the Gain Auto function see Section 9 11 2 on page 221 The camera s gain is determined by the value of the Gain Raw parameter Gain Raw is adjusted on a decimal scale The minimum decimal setting varies depending on the camera model and on whether vertical binning is enabled see Table 18 The maximum setting depends on whether the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed or yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed Bayer BG 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed Camera Model Min Setting Min Setting Max Setting Max Setting with Vertical 8 bit depth 16 bit depth Binning scA640 70 320 260 1023 511 scA640 74 280 200 1023 511 scA640 120 150 120 800 400 scA780 54 350 280 1023 511 scA1000 20 330 260 1023 511 scA1000 30 360 280 1023 511 scA1300 32 300 200 850 400 scA1390 17 360 280 1023 511 scA1400 17 192 110 1023 511 scA1400 30 150 0 850 400 scA1600 14 350 280 1023 511 scA1600 28 285 220 850 400 Table 18 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Gain Raw Settings 182 Basler scout Standard Features To set the Gain Raw parameter value Set the Gain Selector to Gain All Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Gain Selector and the Gain Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API Th
208. is being triggered in this manner it is important that you do not attempt to trigger frames at a rate that is greater than the maximum allowed There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Frame start trigger signals applied to the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status will be ignored camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout N frame transmission a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting 3 Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed Acquisition Start Trigger Signal ZZA Frame Start Trigger Signal Fig 43 Acquisition Start and Frame Start Triggering Basler scout 81 Image Acquisition Control Applying Trigger Signals The paragraphs above mention applying a trigger signal There are two ways to apply an acquisition start or a frame start trigger signal to the camera via software or via hardware To apply trigger signals via software you must first select the acquisition start or the frame start trigger and then indicate that software will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a Trigger Software command is exec
209. its effective The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono16 output Note that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Low byte of brightness value for Po B High byte of brightness value for Po Bo Low byte of brightness value for P4 B3 High byte of brightness value for P4 B4 Low byte of brightness value for Po Bs High byte of brightness value for Po Be Low byte of brightness value for P3 B7 High byte of brightness value for P3 Bg Low byte of brightness value for P4 Bg High byte of brightness value for P4 Bm 7 Low byte of brightness value for P 3 Bm 6 High byte of brightness value for P 3 Bm 5 Low byte of brightness value for P 2 Bm 4 High byte of brightness value for Ph 2 Bm 3 Low byte of brightness value for Ph 1 Bm 2 High byte of brightness value for Ph 4 Bm 1 Low byte of brightness value for Ph Bm High byte of brightness value for Ph Basler scout 157 Pixel Data Formats When the
210. kModeActive SetValue true Note that making the chunk mode inactive switches all chunk features off Also note that when you enable ChunkModeActive the PayloadType for the camera changes from Pylon PayloadType_Image to Pylon PayloadType_ChunkData For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 250 Basler scout Chunk Features 10 3 Frame Counter The Frame Counter feature numbers frames sequentially as they are acquired When the feature is enabled a chunk is added to each frame containing the value of the counter The frame counter is a 32 bit value The counter starts at 0 and increments by 1 for each acquired frame The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before see below After reaching the maximum value the counter will reset to 0 and then continue counting Be aware that if the camera is acquiring frames continuously and continuous capture is stopped several numbers in the counting sequence may be skipped This happens due to the internal image buffering scheme used in the camera feature or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the frame counter disables all chunk features To enable the fram
211. ke this action Camera can no longer be used 9 Did your application ever run r Yes r No without problems 10 Parameter set It is very important for Basler technical support to get a copy of the exact camera parameters that you were using when the problem occurred To make a copy of the parameters use the dump register tool To get the tool go to www baslerweb com beitraege beitrag_en_19478 html the tool is available for XP PCs only Send the generated file to Basler technical support Or you can look up the settings with the pylon Viewer If you cannot access the camera please try to state the following parameter settings i Pixel format Packet size J Exposure time J Frame rate 11 Live image test image If you are having an image problem try to generate and save live images that show the problem Also generate and save test images Please save the images in BMP format zip them and send them to Basler technical support Basler scout 279 Troubleshooting and Support 280 Basler scout Revision History Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00012501000 10 Jan 2007 Initial release of this document AW00012502000 20 Mar 2007 Updated the camera weights in the specification table in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added the dimensions for cameras equipped with CS mount lens adaptors to Section 1 5 on page 24 Added Section 9 16 on page 235 to describe
212. l see Section 7 4 5 2 on page 91 For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 5 7 1 on page 57 7 4 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware acquisition start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values required to enable rising edge hardware acquisition start triggering with line 1 as the trigger source Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation_RisingEdge Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while
213. laring an X offset coordinate a width a Y offset coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the X offset as 14 the width as 5 the Y offset as 7 and the height as 6 The area of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 76 Only the pixel data from within the area defined by your settings will be used by the related auto function Column 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Row 0 Offset Auto Function Area of Interest oo oo No oa A O N Height Image Area of Interest X Offset Fig 76 Auto Function Area of Interest and Image Area of Interest 216 Basler scout Standard Features Relative Positioning of an Auto Function AOI The size and position of an Auto Function AOI can be but need not be identical to the size and position of the Image AOI Note that the overlap between Auto Function AOI and Image AOI determines whether and to what extent the auto function will control the related image property Only the pixel data from the areas of overlap will be used by the auto function to control the image
214. le Currently there is only one lookup table available i e the luminance lookup table described above Use the LUT Index parameter to select a value in the lookup table The LUT Index parameter selects the value in the table to change The index number for the first value in the table is 0 for the second value in the table is 1 for the third value in the table is 2 and so on Use the LUT Value parameter to set the selected value in the lookup table Use the LUT Index parameter and LUT value parameters to set other table values as desired Use the LUT Enable parameter to enable the table You can set the LUT Selector the LUT Index parameter and the LUT Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Select the lookup table Camera LUTSelector SetValue LUTSelector_Luminance Write a lookup table to the device The following lookup table causes an inversion of the sensor values bright gt dark dark gt bright for int i 0 i lt 1024 i 2 Camera LUTIndex SetValue i Camera LUTValue SetValue 1023 i Enable the lookup table Camera LUTEnable SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easi
215. lector ccccccccceeeceeeee eee 209 212 M max height parameter seenen 241 max width parameter eeen 241 maximum acquisition frame rate 143 148 maximum lens thread length seee 32 mechanical stress tests 0 0 0 cere 33 mirror IMage eeen 204 mode of operation of auto function CONTINUOUS ooo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeee 215 ONCE E E S 215 MOOEIS irka eari dea 1 mono 12 packed pixel format 159 mono 16 pixel format eeeeeeeeeeee 157 mono 8 pixel format 0 00 eee 155 177 mounting holes secc 29 multiple cameras on a buS sss 263 Basler scout Index O optical size of the sensor 2 4 6 8 10 output line voltage requirements s es 60 output lines CONTIQUIING araa ee A Ana iaeia aas 67 electrical characteristics 0 60 INVOMGh sia f 2 20 di dene ented 69 FESPONSE TIME neee 63 voltage requirements n 60 OVE triggering ocene 98 110 overlapped exposure eee 128 130 P packet size 146 151 263 266 268 packet size parameter 0 146 151 parameter Sets ee 243 parameter sets SAVING eeeeeeee 244 parameters loaded at startup 247 pin assignments ncen 50 51 pixel data formats ecce 153 YUV 422 YUYV packed 4 161 YUV 422 packed ccce 161 pixel format parameter eee 154 pixel formats Bayer BG 12 packed ccecce 170 Bayer BG 16 cP reari aiudien 168 Bayer BG 8 airain po
216. ler pylon Viewer application to easily set the Acquisition Status Selector Basler scout 233 Standard Features For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 7 1 on page 77 234 Basler scout Standard Features 9 16 Event Reporting Event reporting is available on the camera With event reporting the camera can generate an event and after some intermediate steps transmit a related event message to the PC whenever a specific situation has occurred Currently the camera can generate and transmit an event for two types of situations Overtriggering of the acquisition start trigger has occurred AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventData Overtriggering of the frame start trigger has occurred FrameStartOvertriggerEventData The end of an exposure has occurred ExposureEndEventData An event overrun has occurred EventOverrunEventData An Example of Event Reporting An example related to the Exposure End event illustrates how event reporting works The example assumes that your system is set for event reporting see below and that an end of exposure has just occurred in the camera In this case 1 An Exposure End event is generated The event contains the event in the strict sense and sup plementary information An Event Type Identifier In this case the identifier would show that an exposure end type event h
217. line must be added to the exposure start delays shown in Table 14 to determine the total start delay For example assume that you are using an scA640 70 camera and that you have set the cameras for hardware triggering Also assume that you have selected input line 1 to accept the hardware trigger signal and that you have set the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter for input line 1 to 5 us In this case Total Start Delay Start Delay from Table 14 Debouncer Setting Total Start Delay 33 43 s 5 us Total Start Delay 38 43 us TrigRdy Signal El ExTrig Signal l Exposure Start Delay a Exposure Start Delay e lt q Exposure Exposure Pamen Frame N 1 Frame N 2 Exposure a w lt lt Frame Frame N Readout to the Image Buffer Frame N 1 Readout to the Image Buffer Readout Fa Frame Frame N Transmission to Host PC i Frame N 1 Transmission to Host PC Transmission gt a a Frame N Time to Transmission End Frame N 1 Time to Transmission End Timing charts are not drawn to scale Fig 64 Exposure Start Controlled with an ExTrig Signal You can calculate the frame readout time by using this formula Frame Readout Time T AOI Height 1 x C1 Co Where the values for the constants C4 and C are from the table in Section 7 13 on page 143 for all camera models except the scA750 60 or from the table in Section 7 14 on page 148 for scA750 60 cameras For more infor
218. lling edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal falls and continues until the ExFSTrig signal rises Figure 47 illustrates trigger width exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for each captured frame ExFSTrig Signal Period Exposure ExFSTrig Signal Fig 47 Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must also use the camera s exposure time prameters to set an exposure time This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Trigger Ready signal You should adjust the exposure setting to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure mode and that you intend to use the ExFSTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would use the exposure setting to set the exposure time to 3000 us For more information about the Trigger Ready signal see Section 7 11 3 on page 132 and Section 7 11 4 on page 135 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116 100 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 5 3 3 Frame Start Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of
219. lly referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external acquisition start trigger signal EXASTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExASTrig signal can be used to trigger acquisition start The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame start trigger signals when in this acquisition status When the appropriate ExASTrig signal is applied to line 1 e g a rising edge of the signal for rising edge triggering the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of frame start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When a new ExASTrig signal is applied to line 1 the camera will again exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status 90 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExASTrig signa
220. lon Viewer is included in Basler s pylon Driver Package You can obtain the pylon package from the Downloads section of our website www baslerweb com For more information about using the viewer see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com 3 2 The pylon API You can access all of the camera s parameters and can control the camera s full functionality from within your application software by using Basler s pylon API The Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference contains an introduction to the API and includes information about all of the methods and objects included in the API The programmer s guide and API reference are included in the pylon SDK The Basler pylon Software Development Kit SDK includes a set of sample programs that illustrate how to use the pylon API to parameterize and operate the camera These samples include Microsoft Visual Studio solution and project files demonstrating how to set up the build environment to build applications based on the API The SDK is available in the Downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com Basler scout 43 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters For more information about installing pylon software see the installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 You can download the guide from the Basler
221. ls Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 8 to 36 VDC supplied via the IEEE 1394 cable lt 1 ripple 3 0W 12V 3 7W 12V 2 75W 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional 8 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA1400 17fm fc scA1400 30fm fc scA1600 14fm fc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 170 g typical 170 g typical 160 g typical 190 g typical 190 g typical 180 g typical Conformity CE FCC GenlCam IP30 Table 4 General Specifications Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA1600 28fm fc Sensor Size fm 1626 x 1232
222. lt in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels Effect on scA750 60 Models An increase of 4 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels And a decrease of 4 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels Effect on scA640 120 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 Models If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 Bayer RG 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed an increase of 64 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels And a decrease of 64 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed Bayer BG 16 Bayer RG 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed an increase of 4 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels A decrease of 4 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels 188 Basler scout Standard Features Setting the Black Level The black level can be adjusted by changing the value of the Black Level Raw parameter The Black Level Raw parameter value can rang
223. lt of shifting three times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 8 ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 a S a If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore that you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 32 Shifted Three Times Shift by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 through bit 0 from the ADC The result of shifting four times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 16 ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will Shifted Four Times 4 one 194 Basler scout Standard Features automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the multiply by 4 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 16 9 4 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift
224. lue for Ph 3 Bm 5 Y value for Ph 2 Bm 4 V value for Ph 3 Bm 3 Y value for Ph 4 Bm 2 U value for P Bm 1 Y value for Ph Bm V value for Ph 4 Basler scout 175 Pixel Data Formats When a color camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV output the pixel data output for the Y component is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The range of data values for the Y component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 The pixel data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the straight binary type The range of data values for a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 127 OxFE 126 0x81 1 0x80 0 Ox7F 1 0x01 127 0x00 128 The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from 128 to 127 decimal Notice that the data values have been arranged to represent the full signal level range 176 Basler scout 8 3 8 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 When a color camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format the pixel values in each captured Pixel Data Formats image are first interpolated and converted to the YUV color model as described for
225. ly set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 212 Basler scout Standard Features 9 10 Gamma The gamma correction feature lets you modify the brightness of the pixel values output by the camera s sensor to account for a non linearity in the human perception of brightness To accomplish the correction a gamma correction factor y is applied to the brightness value Y of each pixel according to the following formula Y Yy uncorrected Y corrected Y xY max max The formula uses uncorrected and corrected pixel brightnesses that are normalized by the maximum pixel brightness The maximum pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output and 4095 for 12 bit output When the gamma correction factor is set to 1 the output pixel brightness will not be corrected A gamma correction factor between 0 and 1 will result in increased overall brightness and a gamma correction factor greater than 1 will result in decreased overall brightness In all cases black output pixel brightness equals 0 and white output pixel brightness equals 255 at 8 bit output and 4095 at 12 bit output will not be corrected Setting the Gamma You can enable or disable the gamma correction feature by setting the value of the Gamma Enable parameter When gamma correction is enabled the correction factor is determined by the value of the Gamma parameter The Gamma parameter can be set in a range from 0 t
226. ly with no action by the user Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger On Trigger Source for the acquisition start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the acquisition start trigger Rising Edge Acquisition Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off a trigger signal generated by the camera internally aitrigger signal applied by the user RSA camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal V camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal EE frame exposure and readout _ frame transmission Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed PSR KK SR Acquisition Start Trigger Signal applied to line 1 ZA BA we Frame Start Trigger Signal ice ore ee Re G Bo ee De ee ee eee ee Time Fig 55 Use Case 3 Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off Basler scout 125 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 4 Acquisition and Frame Start Triggers Both On Use case four is illustrated on page 127 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the acquisition start trigger mode is set to on the user must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera In this case we have set the ac
227. m allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Software acquisition start trigger signals that are applied to the camera when it is not ready to receive them will be ignored Section 7 5 2 2 on page 97 includes more detailed information about applying a software acquisition start trigger to the camera using Basler pylon For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 7 13 on page 143 and Section 7 14 on page 148 For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116 7 6 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software acquisition start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with software frame start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select t
228. m x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Not applicable 91 65 mm x 44mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 160 g typical 160 g typical 160 g typical 180 g typical Not applicable 180 g typical Conformity CE FCC GenlCam IP30 Table 3 General Specifications Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA1400 17fm fc scA1400 30fm fc scA1600 14fm fc Sensor Size fm 1392 x 1040 fm 1392 x 1040 fm 1626 x 1236 H x V pixels fc 1390 x 1038 fc 1390 x 1038 fc 1624 x 1234 Sensor Type Sony ICX285 AL AQ Sony ICX285 AL AQ Sony ICX274 AL AQ Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 2 3 2 3 1 1 8 Pixel Size 6 45 um x 6 45 um 6 45 um x 6 45 um 4 4 um x 4 4 um Max Frame Rate 17 fps 30 fps 14 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type IEEE 1394b Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Mode
229. matically adjusting a parameter value and accordingly for controlling the related image property Some auto functions use their own individual Auto Function AOI and some auto functions share a single Auto Function AOI An auto function automatically adjusts a parameter value until the related image property reaches a target value Note that the manual setting of the parameter value is not preserved For example when the Gain Auto function adjusts the gain parameter value the manually set gain parameter value is not preserved For some auto functions the target value is fixed For other auto functions the target value can be set as can the limits between which the related parameter value will be automatically adjusted For example the gain auto function lets you set an average gray value for the image as a target value and also set a lower and an upper limit for the gain parameter value Generally the different auto functions can operate at the same time For more information see the following sections describing the individual auto functions pertinent camera settings and with the general circumstances used for capturing images Otherwise the target value will only be approached For example with a short exposure time insufficient illumination and a low setting for the upper limit of the gain parameter value the Gain Auto function may not be able to achieve the current target average gray value setting for the image A target
230. mation about the frame height see Section 9 6 on page 198 You can calculate the time to transmission end Te using these three steps 1 Calculate the frame readout time T using the formula above Basler scout 141 Image Acquisition Control 2 Calculate the base transmission time Tp using these formulas _ Value of the Payload Size Parameter Packet periame Value of the Packet Size Parameter round the result up to the nearest integer Tp Packets per frame x 125 us 3 Compare the results If Th lt T then T T 250 us If Tp gt T then Te Tp 250 us You can determine the value of the Payload Size and Packet Size parameters from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to work with the parameter values Get payload size int64_t payloadSize Camera PayloadSize GetValue Set packet siz Camera PacketSizeSize SetValue 4096 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 142 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 13 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate All Models Except scA750 60 scA750 60 fm fc For information about scA750 60 fm fc cameras see The information in this sectio
231. me start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When a new software acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will again exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Note that as long as the Trigger Selector parameter is set to Acquisition Start a software acquisition start trigger will be applied to the camera each time a Trigger Software command is executed 7 4 4 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software acquisition start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode_Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the s
232. meras the default resolution is set to 1626 x 1232 pixels for mono models and to 1624 x 1230 pixels for color models You can change the size and the position of the AOI by changing the value of the camera s X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the area of interest The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting row for the area of interest The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the area of interest The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the area of interest When you are setting the camera s area of interest you must follow these guidelines The sum of the current X Offset setting plus the current Width setting must not exceed the width of the sensor in the camera model you are using For example on the monochrome version of the scA640 70 the sum of the current X Offset setting plus the current Width setting must not exceed 659 The sum of the current Y Offset setting plus the current Height setting must not exceed the height of the sensor in the camera model you are using For example on the monochrome version of the scA640 70 the sum of the current Y Offset setting plus the current Height setting must not exceed 494 On monochrome cameras The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1 On color cameras The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can
233. more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 5 7 2 on page 60 7 11 2 Acquisition Status Indicator When controlling image acquisition with a software trigger you can use the acquisition status feature to determine when the camera is rady to be triggered for an image acquisition For more information about the acquisition status feature see Section 9 15 on page 233 7 11 3 Trigger Ready Signal All Models Except scA750 60 scA750 60 fm fc For information about scA750 60 fm fc cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 7 11 4 on page 135 As described in the previous section the cameras can operate in an overlapped acquisition fashion When the camera is operated in this manner it is especially important that the exposure time of a new image acquisition not start until exposure of the previously acquired image is complete and the exposure time of a new image acquisition not end until readout of the previously acquired image is complete The camera supplies a Trigger Ready TrigRdy output signal you can use to ensure that these conditions are met when you are using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition The trigger ready signal relates to different trigger signals depending on the image acquisition control mode In standard mode the trigger ready signal relates to the frame start tr
234. n applies to all camera models except the Section 7 14 on page 148 In general the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate can be limited by three factors The amount of time it takes to read an acquired image out of the imaging sensor and into the camera s frame buffer an acquired image is also known as a frame This time varies depending on the height of the frame Shorter frames take less time to read out of the sensor The frame height is determined by the camera s AOI settings The exposure time for acquired frames If you use very long exposure times you can acquire fewer frames per second The number of packets needed to transfer an acquired frame from the camera to your PC acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible To determine the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with your current camera settings you can read the value of the camera s Resulting Frame Rate parameter This parameter indicates the camera s current maximum allowed frame rate taking the AOI exposure time and packet size settings into account You can read the current value of the Resulting Frame RateAbs parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the
235. n page 101 and Section 7 6 3 4 on page 114 explain how to configure the camera to react to a hardware trigger signal and how to assign an input line to receive the hardware trigger signal The default line assignments depend on the image acquisition control mode Standard mode By default physical input line 1 is assigned to receive an ExTrig signal to serve as the frame start trigger By default physical input line 2 is assigned to receive an ExTrig signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger Legacy mode By default physical input line 1 is assigned to receive the ExTrig signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger You can assign only one line to receive the ExTrig input signal Basler scout 65 1 0 Control 6 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive a User Input Signal You can use an unassigned input line to receive your own user generated input signal The electrical characteristics of your input signal must meet the requirements shown in the Physical Interface section of this manual You can use the Line Status or Line Status All parameters to monitor the state of the input line that is receiving the user defined signal A line assigned to receive an ExTrig input signal can t be used to receive a user designed input signal For more information about using the Line Status and Line Status All parameters see Section 6 3 1 on page 75 and Section 6 3 2 on page 75 66 Ba
236. n rows and for the odd rows of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG12 Packed output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Bo the first byte of data for a row Bm the last byte of data for a row Even Rows Byte Data Bo Blue value for Po bits 11 4 B Green value for P4 bits 3 0 Blue value for Pg bits 3 0 Bo Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B3 Blue value for P3 bits 11 4 B4 Green value for P3 bits 3 0 Blue value for Po bits 3 0 Bs Green value for P bits 11 4 Be Blue value for P4 bits 11 4 B7 Green value for Ps bits 3 0 Blue value for P4 bits 3 0 Bg Green value for Ps bits 11 4 e e Bm 5 Blue value for P 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Green value for Ph 2 bits 3 0 Blue value for P 3 bits 3 0 Bm 3 Green value for P o bits 11 4 Bm 2 Blue value for P 4 bits 11 4 Bm 1 Green value for P bits 3 0 Blue value for P 1 bits 3 0 Bm Green value for P bits 11 4 170 Basler scout Odd Rows Byte Data Bo Green value for Pg bits 11 4 B Red value for P4 bits 3 0 Green value for Pg bits 3 0
237. n the images captured by a color camera You can tell how the current AOI is aligned to the Bayer filter by reading the value of the Pixel Color Filter parameter For more information about the camera s AOI feature see Section 9 6 on page 198 Basler scout 163 Pixel Data Formats 8 3 2 Bayer BG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 8 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 8 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 8 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The BG in the name Bayer BG 8 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even rows in the images pixel one will be blue pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue pixel four will be green etc For odd rows in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green pixel four will be red etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 8 3 1 on page 162 The tables below describe how the data for the even rows and for the odd rows of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG 8 output The following sta
238. nal level range 174 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats 8 3 7 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format On color cameras the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV packed pixel data format is similar to the YUV 4 2 2 pixel format described in the previous section The only difference is the order of the bytes transmitted to the host PC With the YUV 4 2 2 format the bytes are ordered as specified in the DCAM standard issued by the 1394 Trade Association With the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV format the bytes are ordered to emulate the ordering normally associated with analog frame grabbers and Windows frame buffers The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV output With this format the Y component is transmitted for each pixel but the U and V components are only transmitted for every second pixel The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Y value for Po B4 U value for Po Bo Y value for P B3 V value for Po B4 Y value for Po B5 U value for Ps Be Y value for P3 B7 V value for Ps Bg Y value for P4 Bg U value for P4 Bio Y value for Ps B41 V value for Py Bm 7 Y value for Ph 3 Bm 6 U va
239. nd Precautions 19 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Quantum Efficiency 350 450 550 650 750 850 950 1050 Wave Length nm Fig 14 scA750 60fc Spectral Response no Cc O a ip aa o 2 T ae 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 15 scA780 54fc Spectral Response 20 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 0 0 9 r f 0 8 J 5 pe 0 6 f p Blue 0 5 jA cal Red Relative Response T a E eee a a S a a er ee ti iC lee 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 16 scA1000 20fc and scA1000 30fc Spectral Response Relative Response 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 17 scA1300 32fc Spectral Response Basler scout 21 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Relative Response 0 0 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 18 scA1390 17fc Spectral Response Relative Response 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 19 scA1400 17fc and scA1400 30fc Spectral Response 22 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions
240. ndards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Bg the first byte of data for a row Bm the last byte of data for a row Even Rows Odd Rows Byte Data Byte Data Bo Blue value for Po Bo Green value for Po By Green value for P4 B4 Red value for P4 Bo Blue value for Po Bo Green value for Po B3 Green value for P3 B3 Red value for P3 By Blue value for P4 B4 Green value for P4 Bs Green value for P5 Bs Red value for Ps 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e Bm 5 Blue value for Ph 5 Bm 5 Green value for Ph 5 Bm 4 Green value for Ph 4 Bm 4 Red value for P 4 Bn 3 Blue value for P 3 Bm 3 Green value for P 3 Bm 2 Green value for P 5 Bm 2 Red value for Ph 2 Bm 1 Blue value for P Bm 1 Green value for P 4 Bm Green value for Ph Bm Red value for Ph 164 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats With the camera set for Bayer BG 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 Basler scout 165 Pixel Data Formats 8 3 3 Bayer RG 8 Format Equivalent to
241. ng edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal falls The following figure illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering ExFSTrig Signal Period Is ExFSTrig Signal SC o T Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 45 Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering Note that if you attempt to trigger a new exposure start while the previous exposure is still in progress the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated This situation is illustrated below for rising edge triggering This rise in the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated ExFSTrig Signal o Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 46 Overtriggering with Timed Exposure Basler scout 99 Image Acquisition Control For more information about the Frame Start Overtrigger event see Section 9 16 on page 235 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116 Trigger Width Exposure Mode When trigger width exposure mode is selected the length of the exposure for each frame acquisition will be directly controlled by the ExFSTrig signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal rises and continues until the ExFSTrig signal falls If the camera is set for fa
242. ng the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the image acquisition control mode to standard mode and to legacy mode respectively Camera TriggerControliImplementation TriggerControliImplementation_Standard Camera TriggerControliImplementation TriggerControlImplementation_Legacy For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the image acquisition control mode For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 78 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 2 Means for Controlling Image Acquisition in Standard Mode This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control In principle this section also applies if the legacy mode is enabled instead In this case however the following differences must be taken into account the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode
243. not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera will ignore any frame start trigger signals that it receives when it is not waiting for frame start trigger This situation is commonly referred to as over triggering the camera If you are triggering frame acquisition with an ExFSTrig signal and you attempt to To avoid over triggering you should not attempt to acquire frames at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExFSTrig signal see Section 7 4 5 2 on page 91 98 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 7 7 1 on page 84 For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 7 13 on page 143 and Section 7 14 on page 148 7 5 3 2 Exposure Modes If you are triggering the start of frame acquisition with an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal two exposure modes are available timed and trigger width Timed Exposure Mode When timed mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the the camera s exposure time parameters If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal rises If the camera is set for falli
244. ns for choosing the image acquisition control mode If you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras we recommend choosing the legacy mode In this mode triggering the camera will be exactly as for previous cameras Note also that you will not have to modify any code of your application If you do not want to operate the camera together with previous cameras we most strongly recommend choosing the standard mode For more information about acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode see Section 7 6 on page 103 For more information about acquisition start trigger and frame start trigger in the standard mode see Section 7 4 on page 85 and Section 7 5 on page 92 respectively For more information about determinig the camera s firmware version see Section 9 18 on page 241 image acquisition control will be in legacy mode If you want the camera to start in standard mode set the camera to standard mode see below save the current parameter settings as a user set and designate this user set as the startup set When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the Basler scout 77 Image Acquisition Control For more information about saving parameter settings as a user set and about working with user sets see Section 9 19 on page 243 Setting the Image Acquisition Control Mode You can set the image acquisition control mode from within your application software by usi
245. nsmission Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed Acquisition Start i Li Li Li Li Li Li Trigger Signal Sga bei e a eee ee eee Oe eee bee 2 A AA BA AA B Frame Start Trigger Signal applied to line 1 Fig 54 Use Case 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On Basler scout 123 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 3 Acquisition Start Trigger On Frame Start Trigger Off Use case three is illustrated on page 125 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the acquisition start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera The camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame exposure In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal This type of camera setup is used frequently in industrial applications One example might be a wood products inspection system used to inspect the s
246. ntal Requirements 1 8 1 Temperature and Humidity Housing temperature during operation 0 50 C 32 F 122 F Humidity during operation 20 80 relative non condensing Storage temperature 20 80 C 4 F 176 F Storage humidity 20 80 relative non condensing 1 8 2 Ventilation Allow sufficient air circulation around the camera to prevent internal heat build up in your system and to keep the camera s housing temperature below 50 C Additional cooling devices such as fans or heat sinks are not normally required but should be provided if necessary 36 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 9 Precautions CAUTION CAUTION Avoid Dust on the Sensor The camera is shipped with a cap on the lens mount To avoid collecting dust on the camera s IR cut filter color cameras or sensor mono cameras make sure that you always put the cap in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera To further enhance dust protection the internal space in the camera that contains the imaging sensor is sealed off from the camera s other internal spaces Lens Thread Length is Limited Color models of the camera with a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an IR cut filter mounted inside of the adapter The location of this filter limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the IR cut filter
247. o 3 99902 So if the Gamma parameter is set to 1 2 for example the gamma correction factor will be 1 2 You can set the Gamma Enable and Gamma parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Enable the Gamma feature Camera GammaEnable SetValue true Set the Gamma value to 1 2 Camera Gamma SetValue 1 2 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 213 Standard Features 9 11 Auto Functions 9 11 1 Common Characteristics Auto functions control image properties and are the automatic counterparts of certain features such as the gain feature or the white balance feature which normally require manually setting the related parameter values Auto functions are particularly useful when an image property must be adjusted quickly to achieve a specific target value and when a specific target value must be kept constant in a series of images An Auto Function Area of Interest Auto Function AOI lets you designate a specific part of the image as the base for adjusting an image property Each auto function uses the pixel data from an Auto Function AOI for auto
248. o make that factor less restrictive You will often find that the sum of the exposure time plus the sensor readout time is the most restrictive factor Decreasing the AOI height for the acquired frames will decrease the sensor readout time and will make this factor less restrictive If you are using long exposure times it is quite possible to find that your exposure time is making this factor the most restrictive In this case you should lower your exposure time You may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or increasing the opening of your lens aperture If you find that the number of packets needed to transmit an image is restricting the frame rate you may be able to decrease the number of packets needed to transmit a frame The next section in this manual explains more about the effect of changing the packets per frame For more information about the AOI settings see Section 9 6 on page 198 Formula 1 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the sum of the exposure time plus the sensor readout time 1 Max F Exposure Time in us AOI Height 1 x C4 C ax Frames s Exposure Time in us AOI Height 1 x C4 C Where AOI Height the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI settings The constants C4 and C gt depend on the camera model as shown in the table below scA750 60 fm fc C 31 01 us Co 186 08 us Basler scout 149
249. o pages of this section before you call Filling out this form will help make sure that you have all of the information the Basler technical support team needs to help you with your problem You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and application notes on the Basler website at www baslerweb com 12 2 Obtaining an RMA Number Whenever you want to return material to Basler you must request a Return Material Authorization RMA number before sending it back The RMA number must be stated in your delivery documents when you ship your material to us Please be aware that if you return material without an RMA number we reserve the right to reject the material You can find detailed information about how to obtain an RMA number in the Support section of our website www baslerweb com Basler scout 269 Troubleshooting and Support 12 3 Troubleshooting with the Camera LED If the camera boots up successfully the LED on the back of the camera will light and will remain green continuously If an error condition is detected the LED will begin to flash The number of flashes indicates the detected error as shown in Table 22 LED State Status Indication Off No power to the camera Continuous green The camera is OK Continuous red Internal error Contact Basler technical support Table 22 LED Indications 270 Basler scout Troubleshooting and Support
250. ode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with external frame start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource_Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation_RisingEdge Set for the trigger width exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_TriggerWidth Set the shortest exposure tim the shortest exposure time we plan to use is 1500 us Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 1500 Prepare for frame acquisition here Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Erame acquisition will start each time the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high Retrieve the captured frames Camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the
251. of the camera is equipped with an additive color separation filter known as a Bayer filter The pixel data output formats available on color cameras are related to the Bayer pattern so you need a basic knowledge of the Bayer filter to understand the pixel formats With the Bayer filter each individual pixel is covered by a micro lens that allows light of only one color to strike the pixel The pattern of the Bayer filter used on the camera is as shown in Figure 65 the alignment of the Bayer filter with repect to the sensor is shown as an example only the figure shows the BG filter alignment As the figure illustrates within each square of four pixels one pixel sees only red light one sees only blue light and two pixels see only green light This combination mimics the human eye s sensitivity to color Bi fef fef fei FeR eA eR iC sengor ARA ARA ARE ARA ARE AREO ARECER HE EEHEHEHEHEHEEH EHEHREHREAEREHReEAeaG HEEEHEHEHEHEHEAGE EHEREREREREHReEAeaw HEEEHEHEHEHEHEASE EHEREREREREHReEAeaw HEEEHEHEHEHEHEAGEa EHEREHEREREHReEHAeaw HEEEHEHEHEHEHSEAEa EHEHREHREREREHReEaeaw HEEEHEHEHEHEHEAEa ARA ARA ARE ARA ARE AREO ARECER Bicie pc isi eiii iiae iie ARA ARA ARE ARA ARE AREO ARECIR Pixels Fig 65 Bayer Filter Pattern 162 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats 8 3 1 1 Color Filter Alignment The alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels in the images acquired by color cameras is either Bayer BG or Bayer RG depending on the camera mod
252. om Basler Basler also offers a standard I O cable assembly that is terminated with a 12 pin Hirose plug on one end and unterminated on the other Contact your Basler sales representative to order connectors or standard I O cables Basler scout 53 Physical Interface Hirose HR10A 10P 12S 12 pin Plug Not Connected a O on 1 0 In Gnd Prout EE C owa Standard I O Cable Fig 34 Standard I O Cable 54 An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 12 pin connector must have 12 pins Use of a smaller plug such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins can CAUTION damage the pins in the camera s 12 pin connector Basler scout Physical Interface 5 4 3 PLC I O Cable As with the standard I O cable described in the previous section the PLC I O cable is a single cable that connects to the camera s I O lines The PLC I O cable adjusts the voltage levels of PLC devices to the voltage levels required by the camera and it protects the camera against negative voltage and reverse polarity Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided If power for the I O input is supplied at 24 VDC you can also use a PLC I O cable We recommend using a PLC I O cable if the camera is connected to a PLC device when the camera is not connected to a PLC device Basler offers PLC I O cables with 3 meter and 10 meter lengt
253. on 2 on page 41 and Section 3 on page 43 has been revised to reflect that the pylon driver package is now downloadable from the website Removed the incorrect information about a Device User ID parameter in Section 9 18 on page 241 and replaced it with the correct information about the Device ID parameter Added Section 12 2 on page 225 describing how to obtain an RMA number AW00012511000 17 June 2009 Updated sensor name Micron MT9V022 to Aptina MT9V022 in Section 1 2 on page 2 Removed the notes designating the information about the scA1300 32fm fc cameras as preliminary in Section 1 2 on page 2 Updated minimum allowed exposure timens in Section 7 7 on page 116 Updated the constants C4 Cs and C3 for scA1300 32fm fc cameras in Section 7 13 on page 144 Added the digital shift feature in Section 9 4 on page 191 Corrected the indications of x offset and y offset in Figure 68 in Section 9 6 on page 198 and in Figure 65 in Section 9 11 1 2 on page 216 Added the reverse X feature in Section 9 8 on page 204 Removed the statement that auto functions have no effect on frame rate in Section 9 11 1 on page 214 and added a note that frame rate may be affected if exposure auto is used Section 9 11 3 on page 223 Added a reference to the reverse X feature in Section 9 11 1 2 on page 216 Replaced Auto Gain Raw by the correct Gain Raw All parameter name in Section 9 11 2 on page 221 Replaced Auto Exposure Time
254. on Sets cece 243 247 defined assii iieiea 243 COnNformity 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 7 9 11 connector types ue cece eeee tees 52 CONNECHOSIS cccceccceeeeecceeeeseeeeeseeeeees 49 52 continuous acquisition mode 83 CRC checksum Chunk sss 261 287 Index D debouncer and exposure start delay 141 explained ee 229 SOMIAG eao ai aiian 230 default configuration set cee 243 device firmware version parameter 241 device ID parameter ecce 241 device model name parameter 241 device scan type parameter 241 device vendor name parameter 241 digital Shifts ee kareena 191 CIMENSIONS ien endrede iniiai daai 29 disable parameter limits explained ooo eeeeeeeeceeeteeeeeeeeseeeerees 228 E electromagnetic interference eee 35 electrostatic discharge ceecee 35 0 ease eee ee acer Rae Bieri aa enor are are 35 environmental requirements 36 Sates Pear ence E AAT RES Ser 35 event Acquisition Start Overtrigger 235 Event Overrun ou eeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 235 Exposure End ssscceesseeereseeees 235 Frame Start Overtrigger 0 235 event reporting eee eeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeneees 235 exposure overlapped nr 128 130 exposure active signal ee 131 EXPOSE AUTO eects 223 exposure mode InN e EA EEE E 99 111 trigger width oee 100 112 exposure MOES sssss
255. or not the reverse X feature is enabled an Image AOI will display different images and an Auto Function AOI will refer to different image contents The positions of the AOls relative to the sensor will not change AOls used for the auto function feature will behave analogously to standard For more information about auto functions see Section 9 11 on page 214 Basler scout 205 Standard Features Setting Reverse X You can enable or disable the reverse X feature by setting the ReverseX parameter value You can set the parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Enable reverse X Camera ReverseX SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 206 Basler scout Standard Features 9 9 Luminance Lookup Table 9 9 1 Lookup Table All Models Except scA750 60 scA750 60 fm fc For information about scA750 60 fm fc cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 9 9 2 on page 210 On these cameras pixel data is acquired at 12 bit depth When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 16 o
256. or_Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource_ExposureActive Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Out2 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource_TriggerReady j For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about setting the state of user settable output signals see Section 6 2 2 on page 68 Basler scout 67 1 0 Control For more information about working with the timer output signals see Section 6 2 4 on page 70 For more information about the exposure active signal see Section 7 11 1 on page 131 For more information about the trigger ready signal see Section 7 11 3 on page 132 and Section 7 11 4 on page 135 6 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lines As mentioned in the previous section you can designate one or more of the user output lines as user settable Once you have designated an output line as user settable you can use camera parameters to set the state of the line Setting the State of a Single User Settable Output Line To set the state of a single user settable output line Use the User Output Selector to select the output line you want to set For example if you have designated output line 3 as user settable
257. ould be You read the value of the Recommended Packet Size parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to get the parameter values RecommendedPacketSiz int64_t recommendedPacketSize Camera RecommendedPacketSize GetValue j For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 For more information about the camera s maximum allowed frame rate and how it can be restricted by the packet size setting see Section 7 13 on page 143 268 Basler scout Troubleshooting and Support 12 Troubleshooting and Support This section outlines the resources available to you if you need help working with your camera It also provides some basic troubleshooting information that you can use to solve problems 12 1 Tech Support Resources The troubleshooting resources in this section of the manual will help you to find the cause of many common problems If you need more assistance you can contact the Basler technical support team for your area Basler technical support contact information is located in the front pages of this manual If you do decide to contact Basler technical support please take a look at the form that appears on the last tw
258. ower cables parallel to each other Avoid coiling camera cables If the cables are too long use a meandering path rather then coiling the cables Avoid placing camera cables parallel to wires carrying high current switching voltages such as wires supplying stepper motors or electrical devices that employ switching technology Placing camera cables near to these types of devices may cause problems with the camera Attempt to connect all grounds to a single point e g use a single power outlet for the entire system and connect all grounds to the single outlet This will help to avoid large ground loops Large ground loops can be a primary cause of EMI problems Use a line filter on the main power supply Install the camera and camera cables as far as possible from devices generating sparks If necessary use additional shielding Decrease the risk of electrostatic discharge by taking the following measures Use conductive materials at the point of installation e g floor workplace Use suitable clothing cotton and shoes Control the humidity in your environment Low humidity can cause ESD problems Installations provides much more detail about avoiding EMI and ESD This application note can be obtained from the Downloads section of our website www baslerweb com The Basler application note called Avoiding EMI and ESD in Basler Camera Basler scout 35 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 8 Environme
259. pes in Section 1 9 on page 37 Transferred the Software and Hardware Installation section to the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 Added the reference to the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API in Section 2 on page 41 Corrected the minimum value for the Timer Delay Raw parameter and indicated the minimum value for the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter in Section 6 2 4 2 on page 71 282 Basler scout Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00012507000 5 Mar 2008 Integrated the scA1400 30fm fc Corrected the type of interface in the table in Section 1 5 2 2 on page 31 Added information on the lens to which the mechanical shock tests apply in Section 1 5 4 on page 31 Added information on the input line transition threshold in Table 8 on page 51 Added the maximum exposure times and related settings in Section 7 7 1 on page 117 Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual AW00012508000 18 Jul 2008 Integrated information for the scA1300 32fm fc Updated the distances and related tolerances between the front of the lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive area in Section 1 5 on page 24 Indicated the applicability of the mechanical stress test to cameras with standard housing and an extended duration of the broad band vibration test in Section 1 5 4 on page 31 Removed voltage information from Table 8
260. posure modes are available timed and trigger width Timed Exposure Mode When timed mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s exposure time parameters If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExASTrig signal rises If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExASTrig signal falls The following figure illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering ExASTrig Signal Period Is ExASTrig Signal SC o T Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 49 Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering Note that if you attempt to trigger a new exposure start while the previous exposure is still in progress the trigger signal will be ignored and an Acquisition Start Overtrigger event will be generated This situation is illustrated below for rising edge triggering This rise in the trigger signal will be ignored and an Acquisition Start Overtrigger event will be generated ExASTrig Signal Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 50 Overtriggering with Timed Exposure For more information about the Acquisition Start Overtrigger event see Section 9 16 on page 235 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116 Basler scout 111 Image Acq
261. ppear on the title page of this manual Take the following actions After you complete each action capture several images to see if the problem has been corrected Make sure that the lens cap has been removed Check your light source Try increasing the intensity of your light source if possible Check the f stop lens aperture on your lens Try decreasing the f stop to let more light into the camera Check the exposure time setting in the Acquisition Controls group on the pylon Viewer Try increasing the exposure time Check the gain setting Try increasing the gain setting Check the black level setting Try increasing the black level setting Has the problem been corrected Yes Exit this chart Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the title page of this manual Basler scout Troubleshooting and Support Take the following actions After you complete each action capture several images to see if the problem has been corrected s Check your light source Try decreasing the intensity Are the images too light of your light source if possible Check the f stop lens aperture on your lens Try increasing the f stop to let less light into the camera Check the exposure time setting in the Acquisition Controls group on the pylon Viewer Try decreasing the shutter setting Check the gain setting Try decreasing the gain setting Check the brightness setting Try decr
262. put counter reset and to execute a reset via software configure reset of trigger input counter Camera CounterSelector SetValue CounterSelector_Counterl Camera CounterEventSource SetValue CounterEventSource_FrameTrigger select reset by signal on input line 1 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Linel select reset by signal on input line 2 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Line2 Basler scout 257 Chunk Features select reset by software Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Software execute reset by software Camera CounterReset Execute disable reset Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Off For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 258 Basler scout Chunk Features 10 6 Line Status All The Line Status All feature samples the status of all of the camera s input lines and output lines each time an image acquisition is triggered It then adds a chunk to each acquired image containing the line status information The line status all information is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 82 certain bits in the value are associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines If a bit is 0 it indic
263. puter consult the instructions for the adapter and make sure that the adapter is properly configured to supply power to the camera If the camera is connected to a powered hub make sure that the Correct power supply for the hub is working properly the If the camera is connected to a laptop you should use a powered hub between the laptop and the Sice camera or you should install a PCMCIA IEEE 1394 adapter card that connects to an external power supply The IEEE 1394 connector available on many laptops does not supply power to the camera Is your power source correct Yes Replace the IEEE 1394 cable s that runs between the Troubleshooting camera and the PC with a known good cable is complete Exit Does this correct the problem this chart If you are using a desktop PC or a laptop equipped with an IEEE 1394 Troubleshooting adapter card swap the adapter card with a known good card is complete Exit Does this correct the problem this chart No Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the title page of this manual 272 Basler scout Troubleshooting and Support 12 4 2 Do Not Get an Image Use this chart if you get no image at all when you attempt to capture an image If you get a poor quality image use the Poor Image Quality chart Start the pylon Viewer software Is your he M Is Not Bei camera listed in the device tree at the No gt PE My Gamera bola an left side of the view
264. pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 102 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 6 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Legacy Mode This section only applies if the legacy mode is enabled for image acquisition control Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode Otherwise we most strongly recommend enabling the standard mode When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will be in legacy mode The acquisition start trigger of the legacy mode is called frame start trigger in the standard mode The acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 7 1 on page 77 The acquistion start trigger is used to begin frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquistion start trigger acquisition status it will begin a frame acquisition each time it receives an acquistion start trigger signal Note that in order for the camera to be in a waiting for acquistion start trigger acquisition status The Acquisition Mode parameter must be set correctly A proper Acquisition Start command must be applied to the camera For more information about the Acquisition Mode parameter and about Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands
265. quisition start trigger signal source to software so the execution of an acquisition trigger software command will serve as the acquisition start trigger signal The Acquisition Frame Count parameter is set to 3 When an acquisition trigger software command is executed the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has acquired 3 frames it will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Before any more frames can be acquired a new acquisition trigger software command must be executed to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame acquisition In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal Keep in mind that the camera will only react to a frame start trigger signal when it is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A possible use for this type of setup is a conveyor system that moves objects past an inspection camera Assume that the system operators want to acquire images of 3 specific areas on each object
266. r monochrome 8 bit output The test image consists of fixed diagonal gray gradients ranging from 0 to 255 If the camera is set for 8 bit output and is operating at full resolution test image one will look similar to Figure 79 The mathematical expression for this test image Gray Value column number row number MOD 256 A Fig 79 Test Image One Test Image 2 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 1 but it is not stationary The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value column number row number counter MOD 256 238 Basler scout Standard Features Test Image 3 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 12 bit The 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 2 but it is a 12 bit pattern The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value column number row number counter MOD 4096 not have a 10 bit output mode available use of test image 3 on scA750 60 On scA750 60 cameras test image 3 is a 10 bit pattern Since
267. r Mono 12 packed pixel format or a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 16 or the Bayer BG 12 packed pixel format the camera outputs pixel data with 12 effective bits Normally the effective 12 bits transmitted out of the camera for each pixel directly represent the 12 bits reported by the camera s ADC The luminance lookup table feature lets you use a custom 12 bit to12 bit lookup table to map the 12 bits reported out of the ADC to 12 bits that will be transmitted by the camera The lookup table is essentially just a list of 4096 values however not every value in the table is actually used If we number the values in the table from 0 through 4095 the table works like this The number at location 0 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 0 The numbers at locations 1 through 7 are not used The number at location 8 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 8 The numbers at locations 9 through 15 are not used The number at location 16 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 16 The numbers at locations 17 through 23 are not used The number at location 24 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camer
268. r Set Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 or User Set 3 Execute a User Set Save command to save the active set to the selected user set Saving an active set to a user set in the camera s non volatile memory will overwrite any parameters that were previously saved in that user set You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Save command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and execute the command Camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector_UserSetl Camera UserSetSave Execute 244 Basler scout Standard Features For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 9 19 2 Selecting a Factory Setup as the Default Set When the camera is delivered the Standard Factory Setup will be selected as the default set You can however select any one of the three factory setups to serve as the default set To select which factory setup will serve as the default set Set the Default Set Selector to the Standard Factory Setup High Gain Factory Setup or Auto Functions Factory Setup You can set the Default Set Selector from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API
269. r many applications One example is for aerial photography A camera set for free run is used to capture a continuous series of images as an aircraft overflies an area The images can then be used for a variety of purposes including vegetation coverage estimates archaeological site identification etc For more information about the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 7 5 1 1 on page 93 and for information about setting the parameter see Section 7 5 1 3 on page 95 120 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Use Case Free Run Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off The acquisition start trigger is off The camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is off The camera will generate frame start trigger signals internally with no action by the user Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off atrigger signal generated by the camera internally RIRI camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger camera is waiting for a frame start trigger frame exposure and readout frame transmission qu Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed r Acquisition Start it it it Li Li Li Li Trigger Signal t eee ee ee ee ea ee eee ee eee ee ee tee 2 A A BA B
270. ral Specifications Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 3 Spectral Response for Mono Cameras The following graphs show the spectral response for each available monochrome camera model Note The spectral response curves excludes lens characteristics and light source characteristics 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 Relative Response 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm Fig 1 scA640 70fm Spectral Response 12 Basler scout Relative Response Fig 2 Quantum Efficiency Fig 3 scA640 120fm Spectral Response Basler 1 0 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 y 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 scA640 74fm Spectral Response 1 0 500 600 700 Wave Length nm 800 900 1000 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 NI 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 scout 500 600 Wave Length nm 700 800 900 1000 13 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 60 50 404 gt J oO 3 S 30 iT E 20 o 4 J 6 10 0 t 350 450 550 650 750 850 950 1050 Wave Length nm Fig 4 scA750 60fm Spectral Response 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6
271. rame rate and AOI size 0ccccccceeeees 143 148 maximum allowed 06 143 148 acquisition frame rate abs parameter EA E ETE 93 95 104 106 acquisition mode parameter sece 83 acquisition start command 79 83 233 acquisition Start trigger eee 80 o Are E cise sellecedsbieshensizeeciaes 85 acquisition start trigger delay legacy mode c ccceeeeeeettteeeeeeeeeees 113 acquisition start trigger mode parameter 86 ACQUISITION status ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 acquisition stop command 79 83 acquisition trigger wait signal 137 acquistion start trigger in legacy mode 103 active configuration Set ceee 243 AOI see area of interest yd leper a Serene ry hee creer ee 43 area of interest auto function AOI cceeeeeeee 214 default resolution ceeeeeeeees 199 explained ssessssssrersrrrrerrrnrrernesna 198 SEa E EE EEP EE ET 199 using with binning eee 203 area of interest auto functions explained e ran ae ieta aaan 216 AULO FUNCTION oiiaii ceanii taaiaianaa 214 using with binning eee 214 auto function AOI OXPlained ineat ipera pel at eieren 214 Setoa ae e 219 auto function profile o e 225 auto functions mode of operation sessen 215 auto functions factory setup seee 243 B balance white auto sseseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeen 226 bandwidth c ceeeeee 146 147 151 sha
272. ration Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the duration time base The Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value sets the duration time base in us The default is 1 us and it can be changed in 1 us increments Note that there is only one timer duration time base and it is used by all four of the available timers You can set the Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera TimerDurationTimebaseAbs SetValue 5 Basler scout 73 1 0 Control Setting the Duration with an Absolute Value You can also set the Timer duration by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Timer Duration Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us To set the duration for a timer using an absolute value Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector_Timerl Camera TimerDurationAbs SetValue 100 When you use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time the camera ac
273. re are also parameters available to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous frame acquisition Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated hardware trigger ExTrig signal The ExTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic acquisition start Exposure can be set for a preprogrammed period of time Accumulated charges are read out when the programmed exposure time ends At readout the accumulated charges are transported from the sensor s light sensitive elements pixels to the sensor s column buses see Figure 28 on page 46 The charges from the bottom line of pixels in the array are then moved into the analog processing section of the sensor As the charges move from the pixels to the analog processing section they are converted to voltages proportional to the size of each charge The voltages from the analog processing section are next passed to a bank of Analog to Digital converters ADCs Finally the voltages pass through a section of the sensor where they receive additional digital processing and then they are moved out of the sensor As each voltage leaves the sensor it passes through an FPGA and into an image buffer All shifting is clocked according to the camera s internal data rate Shifting continues in a linewise fashion until all image data has been read out of the sensor The pixel data leaves the image buffer and passes back through the FPGA to an IEEE1394b link layer controller w
274. re available on request Color cameras that have the optional CS mount lens adapter do not include an IR cut filter in the adapter Monochrome cameras do not include an IR cut filter in the lens adapter Monochrome cameras with a C mount lens adapter can be equipped with a filter on request Lens Thread Length is Limited The location of the IR cut filter limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the IR cut CAUTION filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate For more information about the location of the IR cut filter see Section 1 5 3 on page 32 Basler scout 197 Standard Features 9 6 Area of Interest AOI The area of interest AOI feature lets you specify a portion of the sensor array and after each image is acquired only the pixel information from the specified portion of the array is transmitted to the host PC The area of interest is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array The top left corner is designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 67 The location and size of the area of interest is defined by declaring an X offset coordinate a width a Y offset coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the x offset as 10 the width as 16 the y offset as 6 and the height as 10 The area of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 67 The camera will
275. re frames When the camera receives an Acquisition stop commana If the camera is not in the process of acquiring a frame its ability to acquire frames will be terminated immediately If the camera is in the process of acquiring a frame the frame acquisition process will be allowed to finish and the camera s ability to acquire new frames will be terminated The camera s Acquisition Mode parameter has two settings single frame and continuous The use of Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands and the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter setting are related If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for single frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed a single frame can be acquired When acquisition of one frame is complete the camera will execute an Acquisition Stop command internally and will no longer be able to acquire frames To acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for continuous frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed frame acquisition can be triggered as desired Each time a frame trigger is applied while the camera is in a waiting for frame trigger acquisition status the camera will acquire and transmit a frame The camera will retain the ability to acquire frames until an Acquisition Stop command is executed Once the Acquisition Stop command is received the camera will no longer be
276. ring with multiple cameras 263 Bayer BG 12 packed pixel format 170 Bayer BG 16 pixel format ee 168 Basler scout Index Bayer BG 8 pixel format ecen 164 Bayer fite oeeie ean a 162 Bayer RG 8 pixel format nsen 166 DINNING ie e eaea e a e Eaa 201 AOI settingS 20 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 image distortion eee eeeeeeee 203 reduced resolution ceecee 203 response to light ccecce 202 SOWNO sitet ie tee 202 bit depth sssr 2 4 6 8 10 black level OXPIAING M EE 188 SCUING aer ea aoe a alee 189 black level raw parameter s e 189 black level selector ncccsscr 189 block diagram ssccccecere 46 48 C cables IEEE TIIA eee t Perea 53 PLC VOnt aee a a 55 standard I O cable nece 53 camera power requirements iccse A A E Manne 2 4 6 8 10 56 chunk enable parameter ssscccecececeee AREO i E 251 254 256 259 261 chunk frame counter parameter 251 chunk line status all parameter 259 chunk mode active parameter 250 chunk parser 251 254 256 259 261 chunk selector 251 254 256 259 261 chunk time stamp parameter 254 chunk trigger input counter parameter 256 cleaning the camera and sensor 39 code snippets programming language 38 Proper USE opie ones aeie 38 COlOr fiter seaseceecevecssecescls chevesaeveeecesecacts 162 configuration set loaded at startup 247 configurati
277. ry possible combination of the parameters associated with acquisition start and frame start triggering They are simply intended to aid you in developing an initial understanding of how these two triggers interact In each use case diagram the black box in the upper left corner indicates how the parameters are set The use case diagrams are representational They are not drawn to scale and are not designed to accurately describe precise camera timings Basler scout 119 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 1 Acquisition and Frame Start Triggers Both Off Free Run Use case one is illustrated on page 121 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger are both set to off The camera will generate all required acquisition start and frame start trigger signals internally When the camera is set this way it will constantly acquire images without any need for triggering by the user This use case is commonly referred to as free run The rate at which the camera will acquire images will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter unless the current camera settings result in a lower frame rate If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is disabled the camera will acquire frames at the maximum allowed frame rate Cameras are used in free run fo
278. s 8 bits of brightness data per pixel The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono8 output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Brightness value for Po B4 Brightness value for P4 Bo Brightness value for Po B3 Brightness value for P3 B4 Brightness value for P4 B5 Brightness value for P5 Be Brightness value for Pg B7 Brightness value for P7 e e e e e e Bm 3 Brightness value for Ph 3 Bm 2 Brightness value for P Bm 1 Brightness value for P 4 Bm Brightness value for Ph Basler scout 155 Pixel Data Formats With the camera set for Mono8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 156 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats 8 2 2 Mono 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono16 pixel data format it outputs 16 bits of brightness data per pixel with 12 b
279. s are as shown in the table below Note that for 16 bit data you might expect a value range from 0x0000 to OxFFFF However with the camera set for Bayer BG 16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are effective Therefore the highest data value you will see is OXOFFF indicating a signal leve of 4095 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 When a camera that is set for Bayer BG 16 has only 12 bits effective the leader of transmitted frames will indicate Bayer BG 12 as the pixel format Basler scout 169 Pixel Data Formats 8 3 5 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 12 Packed pixel data format it outputs 12 bits of data per pixel Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels With the Bayer BG 12 Packed coding the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens in the sensor s Bayer filter you get 12 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens in the filter you get 12 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens in the filter you get 12 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 8 3 1 on page 162 The tables below describe how the data for the eve
280. s relative to the center of the die Photosensitive surface of the sensor 0 17 57006 This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the um lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y Camera model Tilt X Tilt Y scA640 70fm fc 0 47 0 63 scA1300 32fm fc 0 47 0 63 scA640 74 fm fc 0 35 0 47 scA1390 17fm fc 0 31 0 42 scA640 120fm fc 0 62 0 83 scA1400 17fm fc 0 25 0 34 scA750 60fm fc 0 51 0 80 scA1400 30fm fc 0 25 0 34 scA780 54 fm fc 0 35 0 47 scA1600 14fm fc 0 34 0 52 scA1000 20fm fc 0 46 0 63 scA1600 28fm fc 0 34 0 52 scA1000 30fm fc 0 46 0 63 Basler scout 27 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Fig 23 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter in mm unless otherwise noted 0 25 0 25 gt reference plane tolerance to the center of the tolerance to the reference planes lens mount optical axis 0 02 This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die
281. set see below but can also be automatically For more information about the Gain Auto function see Section 9 11 2 on page 221 The camera s gain is determined by the value of the Gain Raw parameter Gain Raw is adjusted on a decimal scale The range for the Gain Raw parameter setting is from 0 to 22 To set the Gain Raw parameter value Set the Gain Selector to Gain All Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Gain Selector and the Gain Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector_All Camera GainRaw SetValue 20 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 186 Basler scout Standard Features If you know the current decimal setting for the gain raw you can use the following formula to calculate the dB of gain that will result from that setting Gain Raw Setting Gaingg 20 x logy 1 l 3 l Example Assume that you are working with an scA750 60 camera that has a gain raw setting of 18 The gain is calculated as follows 18 Gaingp 12 0dB Table 20 shows t
282. set them see Section 9 11 1 2 on page 216 222 Basler scout Standard Features 9 11 3 Exposure Auto Exposure Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart to manually setting an absolute exposure time The exposure auto function automatically adjusts the Exposure Time Abs parameter value within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from Auto Function AOI is reached In contrast to the manually set absolute exposure time the automatically adjusted absolute exposure time and the settable limits for parameter value adjustment are not restricted to multiples of the current exposure time base The exposure auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 will not be used to control the image brightness Instead the current manual setting of the Exposure Time Abs parameter value will control the image brightness The exposure auto function is not available when trigger width exposure mode is selected When the exposure auto function is used the gain auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature If the Auto Exposure Time Abs Upper Limit parameter is set to a sufficiently high value the camera s frame rate may be decreased
283. sition mode 83 software development kit ecce 43 software trigger acquisition Start cceeeeeeeeeeee 89 TAME Stas sseveesviviehie thee bese 96 107 spectral reSPONSE seirer 12 23 standard factory setup 243 245 246 standard I O cable scce 53 startup parameter Set sesse 247 StartUp S t oo 244 247 stress tests ccna 33 SUPPOM wena riranna Enin EELER A a 278 T target Valle nn ounner 214 temperature NOUSING ooeec 36 test image selector cccceeeeeeeees 237 TEST IMAJO irita edee as 237 time delay time base abs parameter 71 UME StAMP ariii donee 254 timed exposure mode 99 111 timer delay eeeseceesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeenereeees 72 timer delay abs parameter sece 72 timer delay raw parameter eic 71 timer delay time eneee 71 timer delay time base cccceeeeeeeees 71 290 timer duration c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 73 timer duration abs parameter a e 74 timer duration raw parameter s e 73 timer duration time base ce 73 timer duration time base abs parameter 73 timer selector cccccccee 70 71 73 74 timer trigger source parameter 70 transition threshold input lines 57 trigger delay ceeeceeseseeeesseeeeeneeeees 231 acquisition start legacy mode 113 frame start standard mode 101 trigger input counter chunk 256 VESET nicer a eA
284. sler scout I O Control 6 2 Configuring Output Lines 6 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical Output Line You can use the camera s output signal assignment capability to assign one of the camera s standard output signals as the source signal for a physical output line The camera has a variety of standard output signals available including Acquisition Trigger Wait only available when the image acquisition control is set to standard mode Trigger Ready Exposure Active Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 You can also designate an output line as user settable If an output line is designated as user settable you can use the camera s API to set the state of the line as desired To assign an output signal to an output line or to designate the line as user settable Use the Line Selector to select Output Line 1 Output Line 2 Output Line 3 or Output Line 4 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to one of the available output signals or to user settable This will set the source signal for the selected line By default the Exposure Active signal is assigned to Output Line 1 and the Trigger Ready Signal is assigned to Output Line 2 You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelect
285. solution your exposure time will not normally be the most restrictive factor on the frame rate However if you are using long exposure times or small areas of interest it is quite possible to find that your exposure time is the most restrictive factor on the frame rate In this case you should lower your exposure time You may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or increasing the opening of your lens aperture For more information about the AOI settings see Section 9 6 on page 198 Formula 1 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the sensor readout time 1 Max F ee DOM aMees AOL HA 1 x gt Where AOI Height the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI settings The constants C4 and C gt depend on the camera model as shown in the table below Camera Model C4 Co Camera Model C Co scA640 70fm fc 25 21 us 1595 12 us scA1300 32fm fc 27 83 us 2725 66 us scA640 74fm fc 24 01 us 1519 18 us scA1390 17fm fc 44 71 us 12158 66 us scA640 120fm fc 14 40 us 1148 27 us scA1400 17fm fc 44 37 us 11410 34 us scA780 54fm fc 25 70 us 2201 60 us scA1400 30fm fc 25 83 us 6426 73 us scA1000 20fm fc 51 13 us 7762 01 us scA1600 14fm fc 52 37 us 6838 87 us scA1000 30fm fc 36 56 us 4656 20 us scA1600 28fm fc 26 60 us 2867 93 us 144 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Formula 2 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the expos
286. start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the camera s Exposure Mode parameter must be set to timed The exposure time for each acquired frame will be determined by the value of the camera s exposure time parameters Software Frame Start Software Frame Start Trigger Signal Received Trigger Signal Received Frame Acquisition re bj Exposure i Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 44 Frame Acquisition with a Software Frame Start Trigger When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the frame rate will be determined by how often you apply a software trigger signal to the camera and you should not attempt to trigger frame acquisition at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Software frame start trigger signals that are applied to the camera when it is not ready to receive them will be ignored Section 7 5 2 2 on page 97 includes more detailed information about applying a software frame start trigger to the camera using Basler pylon For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 7 7 on page 116
287. step of the process an interpolation algorithm is performed to get full RGB data for each pixel This is required because color cameras use a Bayer filter on the sensor and each individual pixel gathers information for only one color For more information on the Bayer filter see Section 8 3 1 on page 162 The second step of the process is to convert the RGB information to the YUV color model The conversion algorithm uses the following formulas Y 0 30R 0 59G 0 11B U 0 17R 0 33G 0 50B V 0 50R 0 41G 0 09B Once the conversion to a YUV color model is complete the pixel data is transmitted to the host PC transfers U values and V values with unsigned integers 128 is added to each U value and to each V value before the values are transferred from the camera This process allows the values to be transferred on a scale that ranges from 0 to 255 The values for U and for V normally range from 128 to 127 Because the camera 172 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output The following standards are used in the table Pg the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer B
288. t allow overlapped exposure on principle To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode And for all models except scA750 60 also use overlapped exposure For more information about overlapped exposure see Section 7 9 on page 128 When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible 84 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 4 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Standard Mode This section only applies if the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 7 1 on page 77 The acquisition start trigger is used in conjunction with the frame start trigger to control the acquisition of frames In essence the acquisition start trigger is used as an enabler for the frame start trigger When the acquisition start trigger is enabled the camera s initial acquisition status is waiting for acquisition start trigger When the camera is in this acquisition status it will ignore any frame start trigger signals it receives If an acquisition star
289. t count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another counting cycle at 0 Accordingly the difference between matching counts will always be one regardless of the number of counting cycles Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one the camera was overtriggered and not all external triggers resulted in frame acquisitions Trigger Input Counter Reset Whenever the camera is powered off the trigger input counter will reset to 0 During operation you can reset the trigger input counter via I O input 1 I O input 2 or software and you can disable the reset By default the trigger input counter reset is disabled To use the trigger input counter reset Configure the trigger input counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter1 and setting the counter event source to FrameTrigger Set the counter reset source to Line1 Line2 Software or to Off Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source You can set the trigger input counter reset parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the trigger in
290. t earliest safe when exposure at earliest safe when exposure moment to trigger for acquisition moment to trigger for acquisition acquisition N 1 N 1 begins acquisition N 2 N 2 begins TrigRdy Signal Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Fig 62 Trigger Ready Signal Basler scout 135 Image Acquisition Control You should be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is enabled the operation of the trigger ready signal will be influenced by the value of the parameter If the value of the parameter is greater than zero but less than the maximum allowed the trigger ready will go high at the rate specified by the parameter value For example if the parameter is set to 10 the trigger ready signal will go high 10 times per second If the value of the parameter is greater than the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with the current camera settings the trigger ready signal will work as described above and will go high at a point that represents the maximum acquisition frame rate allowed the camera will simply ignore the attempt The trigger ready signal will only be available when hardware triggering is enabled If you attempt to start an image acquisition when the trigger ready signal is low By default the trigger ready signal is assigned to physical output line 2 on the camera However the assignm
291. t filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate lt 8 0mm Not to Scale nih 9 a o C mount Lens IR Cut Filter Lens Adapter Fig 27 Maximum Lens Thread Length on Color Cameras An internal IR cut filter is not included on color cameras equipped with the optional CS mount adapter C mount color cameras that do not include an internal IR cut filter are available on request Monochrome cameras are not normally equipped with an internal IR cut filter however they can be equipped with an internal filter on request 32 Basler scout Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results Scout cameras were submitted to an independent mechanical testing laboratory and subjected to the stress tests listed below The mechanical stress tests were performed on selected camera models with standard housings After mechanical testing the cameras exhibited no detectable physical damage and produced normal images during standard operational testing Test Standard Conditions Vibration sinusoidal each axis DIN EN 60068 2 6 10 58 Hz 1 5 mm_58 500 Hz 20 g_1 Octave Minute 10 repetitions Shock each axis DIN EN 60068 2 27 20 g 11 ms 10 shocks positive 20 g 11 ms 10 shocks negative Bump each axis DIN EN 60068 2 29 20 g 11 ms 100 shocks positive 20 g
292. t is included in the camera s API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the time stamp information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Time Stamp parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Time Stamp chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector_Timestamp Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve data from the chunk 254 Basler scout Chunk Features IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64_t timeStamp Camera ChunkTimestamp GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 255 Chunk Features 10 5 Trigger Input Counter The Trigger Input Counter fe
293. t th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Enable the acquisition frame rate parameter and set the frame rate Enabling the acquisition frame rate parameter allows the camera to control the frame vate internally 106 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue true Camera AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue 60 0 Start frame capture Camera AcquisitionStart Execute For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 7 6 2 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 7 6 2 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to begin each frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status frame exposure will start when the software acquisition start trigger si
294. t to off the camera will generate all frame start trigger signals internally or The trigger delay will not operate if the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is if you are using a software frame start trigger Legacy mode The trigger delay can be applied to the acquisition start trigger parameter is set to off the camera will generate all acquisitiion start trigger The trigger delay will not operate if the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode signals internally or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger Setting the Trigger Delay You can set the Trigger Delay Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Standard mode Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_Acquisition Start Trigger delay double TriggerDelay_us 1000 0 1000us 1ms 0 0013 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay_us Select the frame start trigger Basler scout 231 Standard Features Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_FrameStart Trigger delay double TriggerDelay_us 1000 0 1000us 1ms 0 0013 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay_us Legacy mode Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector_AcquisitionStart Tri
295. t trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status In this acquisition status the camera can react to frame start trigger signals and will begin to expose a frame each time a proper frame start trigger signal is applied A primary feature of the acquisition start trigger is that after an acquisition start trigger signal has been applied to the camera and the camera has entered the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status once a specified number of frame start triggers has been received Before more frames can be acquired a new acquisition start trigger signal must be applied to the camera to exit it from waiting for acquisition start trigger status Note that this feature only applies when the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on This feature is explained in greater detail in the following sections Basler scout 85 Image Acquisition Control 7 4 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode The main parameter associated with the acquisition start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger has two available settings off and on For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 7 4 1 1 Acquisit
296. tes This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 178 Basler scout Pixel Data Formats 8 4 Pixel Transmission Sequence For each captured image pixel data is transmitted from the camera in the following sequence Row Col o Row Col 4 Rowo Cola ROWgCOlm2 ROW gColm 1 ROWg Col m Row Col 9 Row Col 4 Row Col gt Row Col m Row Col 4 Row Col Row s Col Row p Col 4 Rows Colo Row Colm Row Col m 4 Rows Col m Row p 2 Colo Row p 2 Col 4 Row Colo Row p 2 Col m 2 ROW p 2 COl m 1 ROW p 2 COI m Row p 1 Colo Row p 4 Col4 Row p 4 Colo Row p 4 COl m 2 Row p 4 COl m 1 Row p 1 Colm Row p Col Row p Col 4 Row Col gt Row Col m 2 Row Col m 4 Row Col m Where Row Col g is the upper left corner of the sensor The columns are numbered 0 through m from the left side to the right side of the sensor The rows are numbered 0 through n from the top to the bottom of the sensor The sequence assumes that the camera is set for full resolution Basler scout 179 Pixel Data Formats 180 Basler scout Standard Features 9 Standard Features This chapter provides detailed information about the standard features available on each camera It also includes an explanation of their operation and the parameters associated with each feature 9 1 Gain The camera s gain setting is adjustable As shown in Figure 66 increasing
297. that it is slightly greater than the longest expected duration of an invalid signal Setting the debouncer to a value that is too short will result in accepting invalid signals Setting the debouncer to a value that is too long will result in rejecting valid signals Note that the debouncer delays a valid signal between its arrival at the camera and its transfer The duration of the delay will be determined by the debouncer value Figure 78 illustrates how the debouncer filters out invalid input signals i e signals that are shorter than the debouncer value The diagram also illustrates how the debouncer delays a valid signal Unfiltered arriving signals _ l l l l l l l Debouncer l T T gt l debouncer l value l l Transferred valid signal delay TIMING CHARTS ARE NOT DRAWN TO SCALE Fig 78 Filtering of Input Signals by the Debouncer Basler scout 229 Standard Features Setting the Debouncer The debouncer value is determined by the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter value The parameter is set in microseconds and can be set in a range from 0 to approximately 1 s To set a debouncer Use the Line Selector to select the camera input line for which you want to set the debouncer input line1 or 2 Set the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter You can set the Line Selector and the value of the Line Debouncer Abs parameter from within your application softw
298. the Balance Ratio Selector to red green or blue Set the Balance Ratio Abs parameter to the desired value for the selected color You can set the Balance Ratio Selector and the Balance Ratio Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera BalanceRatioSelector SetValue BalanceRatioSelector_Green Camera BalanceRatioAbs SetValue 1 20 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 190 Basler scout Standard Features 9 4 Digital Shift The information in this section applies to all camera models except the scA750 60 fm fc The digital shift feature lets you change the group of bits that is output from the ADC in the camera Using the digital shift feature will effectively multiply the output of the camera by 2 times 4 times 8 times or 16 times The next two sections describe how the digital shift feature works when the camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format and when it is set for a 8 bit pixel format There is also a section describing precautions that you must observe when using the digital shift feature and a section that describes enabling and
299. the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 118 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control 7 8 Use Case Diagrams This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control In principle this section also applies if the legacy mode is enabled instead In this case however the following differences must be taken into account the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 7 1 on page 77 The following pages contain a series of use case descriptions and diagrams The descriptions and diagrams are designed to illustrate how acquisition start triggering and frame start triggering work in some common situations and with some common combinations of parameter settings These use cases do not represent eve
300. the YUV 4 2 2 Packed format The camera then transmits the 8 bit Y value for each pixel to the host PC In the YUV color model the Y component for each pixel represents a brightness value This brightness value can be considered as equivalent to the value that would be sent from a pixel in a monochrome camera So in essence when a color camera is set for Mono 8 it outputs an 8 bit monochrome image This type of output is sometimes referred to as Y Mono 8 The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when a color camera is set for Mono 8 output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Y value for Po B4 Y value for P4 Bo Y value for P3 B3 Y value for P3 By Y value for P4 Bs Y value for P5 Bg Y value for Pg B7 Y value for P7 Bm 3 Y value for Ph 3 Bm 2 Y value for Ph 2 Bm 1 Y value for Ph 4 Bm Y value for Ph With the camera set for Mono 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below Basler scout 177 Pixel Data Formats This Data Value Hexadecimal Indica
301. the camera and a 1394b hub is 4 5 meters as specified in the IEEE 1394 standard Standard 9 pin shielded 1394b to 1394b cables should be used connecting the camera to an IEEE 1394a device you must use a conversion cable The cable should have a 9 pin IEEE 1394b plug on the end that connects to the camera and a 6 pin IEEE 1394a plug on the end that connects to the device The camera is backward compatible with IEEE 1394a devices If you will be 5 4 2 Standard I O Cable device If the camera is connected to a PLC device we recommend using a PLC I O cable rather than the standard I O cable You can use a PLC I O cable when the camera is not connected to a PLC device if power for the I O input is supplied with 24 VDC See the following section for more information on PLC I O cable The standard I O cable is intended for use if the camera is not connected to a PLC The end of the standard I O cable that connects to the camera must be terminated with a Hirose micro plug part number HR10A 10P 12S or the equivalent The cable must be wired as shown in Figure 34 The maximum length of the standard I O cable is at least 10 meters The cable must be shielded and must be constructed with twisted pair wire Use of twisted pair wire is essential to ensure that input signals are correctly received Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided The required 12 pin Hirose plug is available fr
302. the camera or you must installa PCMCIA IEEE 1394 adapter card that connects to an external power supply Incorrect Power Can Cause Damage The polarity of the power on the camera s IEEE 1394b socket must be as shown in the pin assignment table Do not reverse the power polarity Reversing the polarity will damage the camera If the voltage supplied to the camera is greater than 36 VDC damage to the camera can result If the voltage is less than 8 VDC the camera may operate erratically CAUTION The following voltage requirements apply to the camera power supplied via the IEEE 1394b cable Voltage Significance lt 8 VDC The camera may operate erratically 12 VDC Recommended operating voltage lt 1 ripple required 36 VDC Absolute maximum the camera may be damaged when the absolute maximum is exceeded Table 9 Voltage Requirements for the Camera Power 56 Basler scout Physical Interface 5 7 Input and Output Lines 5 7 1 Input Lines 5 7 1 1 Voltage Requirements Different voltage levels apply depending on whether you are using a standard I O cable or a PLC I O cable see below Voltage Levels When the Standard I O Cable is Used When a standard I O cable is used the following voltage requirements apply to the camera s I O inputs pins 3 and 4 of the 12 pin receptacle Voltage Significance 0 to 24 VDC Recommended operating voltage 0
303. the exposure time base in us and this parameter can be used to change the exposure time base On all camera models except the scA750 60 the default exposure time base is 20 us and the time base can be changed in increments of 1 us On scA750 60 cameras the default exposure time base is 31 us and the time base can be changed in increments of 31 us You can set the Exposure Time Raw and Exposure Time Base Abs parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Basler scout 117 Image Acquisition Control Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode_Timed Camera ExposureTimeRaw SetValue 100 Camera ExposureTimeBaseAbs SetValue 186 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 7 7 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using Absolute Settings You can also set the exposure time by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Exposure Time Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us When you use the Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automa
304. the gain increases the slope of the response curve for the camera This results in a higher gray value output from the camera for a given amount of output from the imaging sensor Decreasing the gain decreases the slope of the response curve and results in a lower gray value for a given amount of sensor output Increasing the gain is useful when at your brightest exposure a gray value lower than 255 in modes that output 8 bits per pixel or 4095 in modes that output 12 bits per pixels is reached For example if you found that at your brightest exposure the gray values output by the camera were no higher than 127 in an 8 bit mode you could increase the Gray Values 4095 255 12 bit 8 bit 12d 6 dB 0 dB 0 25 50 100 Sensor Output Signal Fig 66 Gain in dB gain to 6 dB an amplification factor of 2 and thus reach gray values of 254 Basler scout 181 Standard Features Setting the Gain All Models Except scA750 60 The information in this section applies to all camera models except the scA750 60 fm fc For information about scA750 60 fm fc cameras see the next section Gain can not only be manually set see below but can also be automatically adjusted The Gain Auto function is the automatic counterpart of the gain feature and adjusts the Gain Raw parameter value automatically For more information about auto fuctions see Section 9 11 1 on page 214 For more informat
305. the new configuration sets feature Corrected the description of the available device information parameters in Section 9 18 on page 241 Added Section 9 16 on page 235 to describe the new event reporting standard feature Added Section 10 7 on page 259 to descrice the new CRC checksum chunk feature Added information for the newly released scA750 60fm fc camera Updated all affected text and tables as appropriate AW00012503000 11 Jun 2007 Added information on IP30 Section 1 5 1 1 on page 24 and Section 1 5 2 1 on page 29 Added information drawings inclusive on the 90 head housing variant Section 1 5 2 on page 29 Added Section 1 5 4 on page 31 with information on mechanical stress test results Modified Section 2 for the installation of the Basler pylon software version 1 0 Added information on the 8 bits effective pixel data Section 8 2 1 on page 155 Section 8 2 4 on page 161 Section 8 2 5 on page 161 Section 8 3 3 on page 166 Section 8 3 6 on page 172 Section 8 3 7 on page 175 and Section 8 3 8 on page 177 Added minimum gain raw settings with vertical binning in Section 9 1 on page 181 Minor modifications througout the manual modified frame height to AOI height Basler scout 281 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00012504000 12 Oct 2007 Modified mechanical drawings in Section 1 5 1 1 on page 24 dimensions Section 1 5 2 1 on page 29 dimensions Sect
306. tically changing the Exposure Time Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by your Exposure Time Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time That is you must set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Exposure Time Raw parameter with the current Exposure Time Base parameter For example if the time base was currently set to 62 us you could use the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter to set the exposure to 62 us 124 us 186 us etc Note that if you set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to a value that you could not achieve by using the Exposure Time Raw and Exposure Time Base parameters the camera will automatically change the setting for the Exposure Time Abs parameter to the nearest achieveable value You should also be aware that if you change the exposure time using the raw settings the Exposure Time Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new exposure time Setting the Absolute Exposure Time Parameter You can set the Exposure Time Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 124 double resultingExpTime Camera ExposureTimeAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to
307. time is the product of these two elements Duration Time Timer Duration Raw Parameter Value x Timer Duration Time Base By default the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us Typically the duration time is adjusted by setting only the Timer Duration Raw parameter value The Timer Duration Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 4095 So if the value is set to 100 for example the timer duration will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us To set the duration for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector_Timerl Camera TimerDurationRaw SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Changing the Duration Time Base By default the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us and the timer duration is normally adjusted by setting the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter However if you require a duration time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter alone the Timer Du
308. tings Gaingg 0 0359 x Gain Raw Setting G Where G 0 0359 x Min Gain Raw Setting Example Assume that you are working with a monochrome scA1400 30 camera that has a gain raw setting of 500 Calculating the gain is a two step process Step 1 G 0 0359 x 150 Cc G 5 385 dB Cc Step 2 Gaingp 0 0359 x 500 5 385 dB Gaingp 12 57 dB Table 19 shows the minimum and maximum gain in dB for each camera model 184 Basler scout Standard Features Camera Model dB Gain at dB Gain at Max Setting dB Gain at Max Setting Min Setting 8 bit depth 16 bit depth scA640 70 0 27 8 8 scA640 74 0 28 3 10 1 scA640 120 0 23 34 8 98 scA780 54 0 25 9 7 7 scA1000 20 0 26 6 8 4 scA1000 30 0 25 5 7 3 scA1300 32 0 19 75 3 59 scA1390 17 0 25 5 7 3 scA1400 17 0 31 0 12 8 scA1400 30 0 25 13 9 0 scA1600 14 0 25 9 7 7 scA1600 28 0 20 29 4 13 Table 19 Minimum and Maximum dB of Gain Basler scout 185 Standard Features Setting the Gain scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 fm fc cameras For information about the other camera models see the previous section adjusted The Gain Auto function is the automatic counterpart of the gain feature and adjusts the Gain Raw parameter value automatically For more information about auto fuctions see Section 9 11 1 on page 214 Gain can not only be manually
309. tion CCD Sensor I Vert Vert Vert Vert aa Pixels Su Pixels oe Pixel aor Pixels Em y I lt a 7 i 7 lt 4 ma lt lt e m Vv m _ lt lt lt lt 7 7 7 a lt 4 I lt lt Horizontal le Shift Register Fig 28 CCD Sensor Architecture 24 MB Image Buffer e g ExpActive TrigRdy Link Physical IEEE VGC Layer Layer 1394b Controller Isochronous Controller Isochronous Bus and and Asynchronous Asynchronous Data Data Micro Control Controller Asynchronous AOI Gain Black Level Data Fig 29 Camera Block Diagram 46 Basler scout Functional Description 4 2 Overview scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 fm fc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 4 1 on page 45 Each camera provides features such as a full frame shutter and electronic exposure time control The sensor chip includes gain controls ADCs and other digital devices Exposure start exposure time and charge readout can be controlled by parameters transmitted to the camera via the Basler pylon API and the GigE interface The
310. tion 6 2 1 on page 67 Re wrote Section 7 on page 77 to describe acquisition start trigger and frame start trigger and to take account of standard and legacy modes in image acquisition control Indicated that the maximum possible frame rate can not be achieved with the acquisition mode parameter set to single frame in Section 7 3 on page 83 Section 7 13 on page 144 and Section 7 14 on page 149 Updated the exposure start delay values and the frame readout time formula in Section 7 12 on page 141 Updated C4 Co and C constants formula 1 and the calculated examples in Section 7 13 on page 144 and Section 7 14 on page 149 Indicated the applicability of the gain calculation procedure for the scA640 120 and scA1300 32 corrected the dB gain values at max setting for the scA640 120 and scA1300 32 and included a calculated example in Section 9 1 on page 181 Indicated the effect of the black level parameter setting for the scA640 120 in Section 9 2 on page 188 Modified Section 9 14 on page 231 and Section 9 15 on page 233 to take account of standard and legacy mode in image acquisition control Added events and parameter names in Section 9 16 on page 235 and removed some descriptions for transfer to the Camera Events code sample Rearranged sequence of sections 6 throug 8 Removed the feedback page Basler scout 285 Revision History 286 Basler scout Index A acquisition frame count parameter 87 89 acquisition f
311. tion about the available pixel data formats 8 1 Setting the Pixel Data Format The setting for the camera s Pixel Format parameter determines the format of the pixel data that will be output from the camera The available pixel formats depend on the camera model and whether the camera is monochrome or color Table 15 lists the pixel formats available on each monochrome camera model and Table 16 lists the pixel formats available on each color camera model Mono Camera Model Mono 8 Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed scA640 70 scA640 74 scA640 120 scA750 60 scA780 54 scA1000 20 scA1000 30 scA1300 32 scA1390 17 scA1400 17 scA1400 30 scA1600 14 scA1600 28 Table 15 Pixel Formats Available on Monochrome Cameras Basler scout format available 153 Pixel Data Formats Color Camera Model Mono 8 Bayer RG8 Bayer BG 8 Bayer BG 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed scA640 70 scA640 74 scA640 120 scA750 60 scA780 54 scA1000 20 scA1000 30 scA1300 32 scA1390 17 scA1400 17 scA1400 30 scA1600 14 scA1600 28 Table 16 Pixel Formats Available on Color Cameras format available default set to the Bayer BG 8 pixel format and all oth
312. to 1 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0 gt 1 4 to Region where the transition threshold occurs the logical state is not defined in this region 2 2 VDC gt 2 2 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum the camera may be damaged if the absolute maximum is exceeded Table 10 Voltage Requirements for the I O Input When Using the Standard I O Cable Basler scout 57 Physical Interface Voltage Levels When a PLC I O Cable is Used When a PLC I O cable is used the following voltage requirements apply to the inputs to the PLC I O cable The PLC I O cable will adjust the voltages to the levels required at the camera s I O input see the previous table Voltage Significance 0 to 24 VDC Recommended operating voltage 0 to 8 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0 gt 8 4 to Region where the transition threshold occurs the logical state is not defined in this region 10 4 VDC gt 10 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum the camera may be damaged if the absolute maximum is exceeded Table 11 Voltage Requirements for the I O Input When Using a PLC I O Cable 58 Basler scout Physical Interface 5 7 1 2 Line Schematic The camera is equipped with two physical input lines designated as Input Line 1 and Input Line 2 The input lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the back of the camera
313. to use 100 of the bandwidth available during each bus cycle In this case we would set the camera so that it would put 8192 bytes into the packet that it sends on each cycle of the bus In situation 2 we have three cameras cameras A B and C attached to the bus and all three cameras will transmit image data simultaneously We want camera A to use 25 of the available bus bandwidth camera B to use 25 and camera 3 to use 50 In this case we would set camera A so that it would put 2048 bytes i e 25 of the 8192 byte maximum into each packet it sends We would set camera B so that it would put 2048 bytes 25 of 8192 into each packet it sends And we would set camera C so that it would put 4096 bytes 50 of the 8192 into each packet it sends As shown in the figure the bus carries the packets sequentially on each cycle The total byte load in all of the packets combined is 8192 and is equal to the maximum allowed per cycle Note Basler scout 263 Using Multiple Cameras on a Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth that we could have made the packet sizes smaller and thus the total byte load per cycle would be less than the maximum allowed It is OK to make the total byte load smaller than the maximum but not larger Situation 1 125 us 125 us J p e 8192 Byte Packet Camera A 8192 Byte Packet Camera A Situation 2 125 us 125 us 2048 Byte 2048 Byte 4096 Byte 2048 Byte 2048 Byte 4096 Byte Packet Packet Packet Packet Pa
314. tting the parameter s value to 1 disables vertical binning You can enable horizontal binning by setting the Binning Horizontal parameter Setting the param eter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables horizontal binning by 2 horizontal binning by 3 or horizontal bin ning by 4 respectively Setting the parameter s value to 1 disables horizontal binning You can set the Binning Vertical or the Binning Horizontal parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Enable vertical binning by 2 Camera BinningVertical SetValue 2 Enable horizontal binning by 4 Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 4 Disable vertical and horizontal binning Camera BinningVertical SetValue 1 Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 1 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 9 7 1 Considerations When Using Binning Increased Response to Light Using binning can greatly increase the camera s response to light When binning is enabled ac quired images may look overexposed If this is the case you can reduce the lens aperture reduce the intensity of your illumination reduce the camera s exposure time setting or reduce the camera s gain setting When using
315. tual sensor lines The affected formulas are on page 141 page 144 Basler scout 203 Standard Features 9 8 Reverse X The reverse X feature is a horizontal mirror image feature When the reverse X feature is enabled the pixel values for each line in a captured image will be swapped end for end about the line s cen ter This means that for each line the value of the first pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the last pixel the value of the second pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the next to last pixel and so on Figure 70 shows a normal image on the left and an image captured with reverse X enabled on the right Normal Image Mirror Image Fig 70 Reverse X Mirror Imaging Using AOls with Reverse X You can use the AOI feature when using the reverse X feature Note however that the position of an AOI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled As a consequence an AOI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled 204 Basler scout Standard Features Normal Image Mirror Image eooecooooce a ZBE oocooocooocoooos Lhe aT e m ng AOI AOI Fig 71 Using an AOI with Reverse X Mirror Imaging For color cameras provisions are made ensuring that the effective color filter alignment will be constant for both normal and mirror images AOls Depending on whether
316. ty to perform a reset by setting the reset source to off By default the frame counter reset is disabled To use the frame counter reset feature Configure the frame counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter2 and setting the counter event source to FrameStart Set the counter reset source to line 1 line 2 software or off Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source You can set the frame counter reset parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the frame counter reset and to execute a reset via software configure reset of frame counter Camera CounterSelector SetValue CounterSelector_Counter2 Camera CounterEventSource SetValue CounterEventSource_FrameStart select reset by signal on input line 1 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Linel 252 Basler scout Chunk Features select reset by signal on input line 2 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Line2 select reset by software Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Software execute reset by software Camera CounterReset Execute disable reset Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource_Off For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s
317. ue TriggerMode_Off Camera th xposure tim ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Enable the acquisition frame rate parameter and set the frame rate Enabling the vate internally Camera Camera acquisition frame rate parameter allows the camera to control the frame AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue true AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue 60 0 Start frame capture Camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 Basler scout 95 Image Acquisition Control 7 5 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 7 5 2 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera to begin each frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame exposure will start when the software frame start trigger signal is received by the camera Figure 44 illustrates frame acquisition with a software frame start trigger signal When the camera receives a software trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame
318. ue means the line s state is currently high and a value of false means the line s state is currently low You can set the Line Selector and read the Line Status parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and read the parameter value Select output line 2 and read the state Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector_Out2 bool outputLine2State Camera LineStatus GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 43 6 3 2 Checking the State of All Lines You can determine the current state of all input and output lines with a single operation To check the state of all lines Read the value of the Line Status All parameter You can read the Line Status All parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read the parameter value int64_t lineState Camera LineStatusAll GetValue The Line Status All parameter is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 42 certain bits in the value are associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines If a bit is O it indicates that Basler s
319. uisition Control Trigger Width Exposure Mode When trigger width exposure mode is selected the length of the exposure for each frame acquisition will be directly controlled by the ExASTrig signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExASTrig signal rises and continues until the ExASTrig signal falls If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExASTrig signal falls and continues until the ExASTrig signal rises The following figure illustrates trigger width exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for each captured frame ExASTrig Signal Period Be K Exposure a ExASTrig Signal Fig 51 Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must use the camera s exposure time parameters to set an exposure time This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Trigger Ready signal You should adjust the exposure setting to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure and that you intend to use the ExASTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would use the exposure setting to set the exposure time to 3000 us If you are using the tri
320. umber at location 0 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 0 The number at location 1 is not used The number at location 2 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 2 The number at location 3 is not used The number at location 4 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 4 The number at location 5 is not used The number at location 6 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 6 And so on As you can see the table does not include a mapped 10 bit output value for every pixel value that the sensor can report So what does the camera do when the sensor reports a pixel value that is between two values that have a mapped 10 bit output In this case the camera performs a straight line interpolation between the two nearest neighbors to determine the value that it should use For example assume that the sensor reports a pixel value of 5 In this case the camera would perform an interpolation between the values at location 4 and location 6 in the table The result of the interpolation would be used as the mapped 10 bit value Another thing to keep in mind about the table is that location 1022 is the last location that will have a mapped
321. unk Features 0 0 eee 249 10 2 Making the Chunk Mode Active 0 2 0 0 eee 250 103 Frame Counter c2 steed aa be Some b eaten fe ated hae a e T E nee eee 251 T04 ime Stamp iea masau Ba Se ee Gla eee ee a ee eee 254 10 5 Trigger Input Counter 2 0 tees 256 10 65 Line Status Alle seus aioe ss oy ee lad Sea te a 8 BOE ade See eS 259 10 7 GRC Ch cksumi eeu nd keene oe EEE Veh heed oo oe ee aed SA 261 11 Using Multiple Cameras on a Single Bus and Managing Bandwidth 263 11 1 Using Multiple Cameras Where All Devices are 1394b 0004 263 11 2 Using Multiple Cameras Where 1394a and 1394b Devices are Mixed 265 11 2 1 Recommended Packet Size 0 2 ee 268 12 Troubleshooting and Support 000 2c eee eee eee eee 269 12 1 Tech Support Resources 0 0 ec eee 269 12 2 Obtaining an RMA Number 0 0 00 aaaea 269 Basler scout v Table of Contents 12 3 Troubleshooting with the Camera LED 0 0 0 eee 270 12 4 Troubleshooting Chans 24 cc 0225 esotveroeslantet oa ea es a ee eee d 271 12 4 1 My Camera Is Not Being Recognized 0 0 eee eee 272 12 4 2 Do Not Getanlmage 2 cee eee 273 12 4 3 Can Not Get the Full Frame Rate 0 0 2 cee eee eee 274 12 4 4 Get Poor Image Quality nanana auaa ee 276 12 5 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support 0 eee eee 278 Revision History 03 tincencohen toes oe
322. ure time for the acquired frames 1 Max Frames s _________ Exposure time in us C3 Where the constant C3 depends on the camera model as shown in the table below Camera Model C3 Camera Model C3 scA640 70fm fc 94 us scA1300 32fm fc 52 us scA640 74fm fc 90 us scA1390 17fm fc 176 us scA640 120fm fc 24 us scA1400 17fm fc 173 us scA780 54fm fc 95 us scA1400 30fm fc 97 us scA1000 20fm fc 194 us scA1600 14fm fc 181 us scA1000 30fm fc 136 us scA1600 28fm fc 95 15 us Formula 3 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the number of packets needed to transmit a captured frame from the camera to your host PC via the IEEE 1394 bus _ Value of the Payload Size Parameter resents por ramens Value of the Packet Size Parameter round the result up to the nearest integer 1 Max Frames s Packets per frame x 125 us Example Assume that you are using a monochrome scA640 70 camera set for an exposure time of 2000 us and for 600 x 400 resolution Also assume that you have checked the value of the Payload Size parameter and the Packet Size parameters and found them to be 327100 and 8192 respectively Formula 1 1 Max F a ax Framesis 7450 41 x 252 is 4 150512 is Max Frames s 85 4 frames s Basler scout 145 Image Acquisition Control Formula 2 1 Max Frames s ___ ax rramesis 5000 us 94 us Max Frames s 477 5 frames s Formula 3
323. urface of pieces of plywood on a conveyor belt as they pass by a camera In this situation a sensing device is usually used to determine when a piece of plywood on the conveyor is properly positioned in front of the camera When the plywood is in the correct position the sensing device transmits an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on line 1 it serves as a frame start trigger signal and initiates a frame acquisition The frame acquired by the camera is forwarded to an image processing system which will inspect the image and determine if there are any defects in the plywood s surface For more information about the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 7 5 1 1 on page 93 and for information about setting the parameter see Section 7 5 1 3 on page 95 124 Basler scout Image Acquisition Control Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off The acquisition start trigger is on and the acquisition start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to input line 1 to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status after 3 frames have been acquired The frame start trigger is off The camera will generate frame start trigger signals internal
324. use binning keep in mind that the settings for your area of interest AOI will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would Another way to think of this is by using the concept of a virtual sen sor For example assume that you are using a scA780 54gm camera set for 3 by 3 binning as de scribed above In this case you would act as if you were actually working with a 260 column by 194 line sensor when setting your AOI parameters The maximum AOI width would be 260 and the max imum AOI height would be 194 When you set the X Offset and the Width for the AOI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor columns And when you set the Y Offset and the Height for the AOI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor lines For more information about the area of interest AOI feature see Section 9 6 on page 198 Binning s Effect on the Sensor Readout and Frame Rate Formulas In several areas of the manual formulas appear for sensor readout time and for calculating the maximum frame rate In several of these formulas you must enter the current height of the area of interest AOI If you are not using binning you would enter the height of the AOI in physical sensor lines If binning is enabled however you must use the concept of a virtual sensor as described above and the height of the AOI that you use in the formulas would be in terms of vir
325. uted the selected trigger signal will be applied to the camera To apply trigger signals via hardware you must first select the acquisition start or the frame start trigger and indicate that input line 1 will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a proper electrical signal is applied to input line 1 an occurance of the selected trigger signal will be recognized by the camera The Trigger Selector The concept of the trigger selector is very important to understand when working with the acquisition start and frame start triggers Many of the parameter settings and the commands that apply to the triggers have names that are not specific to a particular type of trigger for example the acquisition start trigger has a mode setting and the frame start trigger has a mode setting But in Basler pylon there is a single parameter the Trigger Mode parameter that is used to set the mode for both of these triggers Also the Trigger Software command mentioned earlier can be executed for either the acquisition start trigger or the frame start trigger So if you want to set the Trigger Mode or execute a Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger rather than the frame start trigger how do you do it The answer is by using the Trigger Selector parameter Whenever you want to work with a specific type of trigger your first step is to set the Trigger Selector parameter to the trigger you want to work wit
326. vertical binning the limits for the minimum gain settings are automatically lowered This allows you to use lower gain settings than would otherwise be available For the lowered limits for the minimum gain settings see Section 9 1 on page 181 202 Basler scout Standard Features Reduced Resolution Using binning effectively reduces the resolution of the camera s imaging sensor For example the sensor in the scA780 54gm camera normally has a resolution of 782 H x 582 V If you set this camera to use horizontal binning by 3 and vertical binning by 3 the effective resolution of the sensor is reduced to 260 H by 194 V Note that the 782 pixel horizontal dimension of the sensor was not evenly divisible by 3 so we rounded down to the nearest whole number Possible Image Distortion Objects will only appear undistorted in the image if the numers of binned lines and columns are equal With all other combinations the imaged objects will appear distorted If for example vertical binning by 2 is combined with horizontal binning by 4 the widths of the imaged objects will appear shrunk by a factor of 2 compared to the heights If you want to preserve the aspect ratios of imaged objects when using binning you must use vertical and horizontal binning where equal numbers of lines and columns are binned e g vertical binning by 3 combined with horizontal binning by 3 Binning s Effect on AOI Settings When you have the camera set to
327. website www baslerweb com 44 Basler scout Functional Description 4 Functional Description This chapter provides an overview of the camera s functionality from a system perspective The overview will aid your understanding when you read the more detailed information included in the later chapters of the user s manual 4 1 Overview All Models Except scA750 60 scA750 60 fm fc For information about scA750 60 fm fc cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 4 2 on page 47 Each camera provides features such as a full frame shutter and electronic exposure time control Exposure start exposure time and charge readout can be controlled by parameters transmitted to the camera via the Basler pylon API and the IEEE 1394b interface There are also parameters available to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous frame acquisition Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated hardware trigger ExTrig signal The ExTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic acquisition start Modes are available that allow the length of exposure time to be directly controlled by the ExTrig signal or to be set for a pre programmed period of time Accumulated charges are read out of the sensor when exposure ends At readout accumulated charges are transported from the sensor s light sensitive elements pixels to the vertical shift registers
328. which case the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless it is manually adjusted When an auto function is set to off the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless it is manually adjusted You can enable auto functions and change their settings while the camera is capturing images on the fly the camera was continuously capturing images the auto function will become effective with a short delay and the first few images may not be affected by the auto function If you have set an auto function to once or continuous operation mode while allow reaching a target value for an image property the auto function will try to If an auto function is set to once operation mode and if the circumstances will not reach the target value for a maximum of 30 images and will then be set to off Basler scout 215 Standard Features 9 11 1 2 Auto Function AOI An Auto Function AOI must be set separately from the AOI used to define the size of captured images the image AOI You can specify a portion of the sensor array and only the pixel data from the specified portion will be used for auto function control An Auto Function AOI is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array The top left corner is designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 76 The location and size of an Auto Function AOI is defined by dec
329. xceeded Table 12 Voltage Requirements for the I O Output VCC 5 7 2 2 Line Schematic The camera is equipped with four physical output lines designated as Output Line 1 Output Line 2 Output Line 3 and Output Line 4 The output lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the back of the camera As shown in the I O schematic each output line is opto isolated See the previous section for the recommended operating voltage The absolute maximum voltage is 30 0 VDC The maximum current allowed through an output circuit is 50 mA A conducting transistor means a logical one and a non conducting transistor means a logical zero Figure 36 shows a typical circuit you can use to monitor an output line with a voltage signal The circuit in Figure 36 is monitoring output line 1 60 Basler scout Physical Interface Q BC847BS Out_1_Ctrl 1 Your Gnd 2 3 4 5 Voltage O_Out_1 gt Output Signal 7 to You 8 O_Out_VCC Camera 33 to 24 12 Pin Your Gnd Receptacle Fig 36 Typical Voltage Output Circuit Figure 37 shows a typical circuit you can use to monitor an output line with an LED or an opto coupler In this example the voltage for the external circuit is 24 VDC Current in the circuit is limited by an external resistor The circuit in Figure 37 is monitoring output line 1 Q Out_1_Ctrl BC847BS 1 Your Gnd 2 3 4 2 2k Q VO Out 1 5 6 7 8 VO_Out_VCC Camera 424 VD
330. yte Data Bo U value for Po B Y value for Po Bo V Value for Po B3 Y value for P4 B4 U value for Po B5 Y value for P3 Be V Value for P2 B7 Y value for P3 Bg U value for P4 Bg Y value for P4 Bio V Value for P4 B41 Y value for Ps Bm 7 U value for Ph 3 Bm 6 Y value for Ph 3 Bm 5 V Value for Ph 3 Bm 4 Y value for P Bm 3 U value for P Bm 2 Y value for Ph 4 Bm 1 V Value for P Bm Y value for Ph Basler scout 173 Pixel Data Formats When the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output the pixel data output for the Y component is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The range of data values for the Y component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 The pixel data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the straight binary type The range of data values for a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 127 OxFE 126 0x81 1 0x80 0 Ox7F 1 0x01 127 0x00 128 The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from 128 to 127 decimal Notice that the data values have been arranged to represent the full sig

Standard Mode

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents